1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/ar/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
49 \AtBeginDocument{\setdefaultlanguage[numerals=maghrib]{arabic}} %%%% without this line nomenclature list not appear in pdf.
50 %\renewcommand{\nomname}{المصطلحات}%% used arabic title for nomname
51 \newcommand\lettergroup[1]{} % without this line "unknown english letters" appear in the index list in pdf.
53 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
54 \use_default_options false
59 \maintain_unincluded_children false
60 \language arabic_arabi
61 \language_package default
64 \font_roman "lmodern" "Scheherazade"
65 \font_sans "lmss" "Scheherazade"
66 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "Scheherazade"
67 \font_math "auto" "auto"
68 \font_default_family default
69 \use_non_tex_fonts true
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format pdf4
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command default
84 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
85 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
89 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
90 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
91 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
96 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
97 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
100 \use_package amsmath 1
101 \use_package amssymb 1
102 \use_package cancel 1
104 \use_package mathdots 1
105 \use_package mathtools 1
106 \use_package mhchem 1
107 \use_package stackrel 1
108 \use_package stmaryrd 1
109 \use_package undertilde 1
111 \cite_engine_type default
115 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation skip
140 \math_numbering_side default
145 \paperpagestyle default
146 \tracking_changes false
147 \output_changes false
156 دليل مستخدم ليك \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
198 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
199 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
212 \begin_layout Standard
213 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
214 LatexCommand tableofcontents
221 \begin_layout Chapter
225 \begin_layout Section
226 ما هو ليك \SpecialChar LyX
230 \begin_layout Standard
231 ليك هو نظام إعداد وثائق.
232 إنه أداة لإنتاج المخطوطات الجميلة والكتب القابلة للنشر، خطابات الأعمال
233 والمقترحات، وحتى الشعر.
234 وهو يختلف عن معظم "معالجات الكلمات" بأنه يستخدم نموذج لغة الترميز كأسلوب
236 وهذا يعني أنه عند كتابة عنوان القسم، ووضع علامة عليه ك "قسم" فإنه سيقوم
237 باختيار الحجم واللون والمحاذاة تلقائيا بالصورة المثالية المتعارف عليها،
238 ولا يحتاج أن تحدد له "خط ثخين، حجمه 17pt ، محاذاة يسار، ...".
239 ليك يعتني بالتنضيد لأجلك.
240 لذلك يمكنك التركيز فقط على محتوى كتابك، وليس على آلية التنضيد.
243 \begin_layout Standard
244 وهذه الفلسفة تم شرحها بمزيد من التفصيل في كتيب المقدمة.
245 إذا كنت لم تقرأه بعد، فأنت بالتأكيد تحتاج إلى ذلك.
246 نعم، نحن نعني الآن من فضلك.
249 \begin_layout Standard
250 كتيب المقدمة يصف عدة أشياء بالإضافة إلى فلسفة ليك: الأشياء الأكثر أهمية،
252 إذا كنت لم تقرأه، سيكون عليك تخصيص جزء من وقتك لتصفحه.
253 وربما يكون من الأفضل الاطلاع بشكل سريع على بقية كتيبات المساعدة.
257 \begin_layout Section
258 كيف يبدو ليك \SpecialChar LyX
262 \begin_layout Standard
263 مثل معظم التطبيقات، ليك لديه شريط القوائم المألوف في الجزء العلوي من النافذة.
264 وتحته شريط الأدوات مع مربع القائمة المنسدلة وأزرار مختلفة.
265 هناك، بطبيعة الحال، شريط التمرير الرأسي ومنطقة عمل رئيسية لتحرير الوثائق.لاحظ
266 أنه لا يوجد شريط تمرير أفقي.
267 هذا ليس خطأ أو سهو، ولكنه مقصود.
268 فعند قراءتك كتاب، تتوقع نهاية السطر لتنتقل للسطر التالي.
269 لكن النص في ليك يتوزع على الصفحات بطريقة عمودية، وبالتالي نحتاج إلى شريط
271 إن هناك ثلاث حالات قد تجعلنا نرغب بشريط التمرير الأفقي.
272 الحالة الأولى هي الصور الكبيرة.
273 ولتجنب عرضها أكبر من الشاشة، انقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على الصورة واستخدام
274 الخيار على مقاس الشاشة في علامة التبويب خيارات لتيك و ليك.
275 الحالات الثانية والثالثة هي الجداول والمعادلات التي هي أوسع من نافذة ليك.
276 يمكنك استخدام مفاتيح الأسهم للتمرير أفقيا من خلال الجدول، ولكن هذا لا يعمل
277 مع للمعادلات حتى الآن.
280 \begin_layout Standard
281 للحصول على وصف موجز لجميع قوائم ليك وأشرطة الأدوات ، ألقِ نظرة على الملحق
286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
288 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
295 \begin_layout Section
299 \begin_layout Standard
300 يتكون نظام المساعدة من كتيبات ليك.
301 ويمكنك قراءة جميع الكتيبات من داخل ليك.
302 وما عليك سوى اختيار كتيب الذي تريد قراءته من قائمة مساعدة.
305 \begin_layout Section
306 الإعدادات الأساسية لليك \SpecialChar LyX
308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
310 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 معظم مميزات ليك يمكن ضبطها من خلال قائمة
320 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
325 \begin_inset Index idx
328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
334 ليك قادر على فحص نظامك لمعرفة البرامج المتوفرة عليه، مثل حزم لتيك وأنواع
336 إنه يساعدك على استخدم هذه المعلومات لإعداد التفضيلات الافتراضية المثالية
338 على الرغم من أن ليك يقوم بهذه العملية آليا عند تركيبه لأول مره.
339 ومن المستحسن القيام بعملية إعادة الضبط
341 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
344 إعادة ضبط النظام كل فترة،
345 \begin_inset Index idx
348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
354 لأن حزم لتيك تتحدث كل فترة، ويجب أن لا ننسى إعادة تشغيل ليك بعد إعادة الضبط
358 \begin_layout Section
359 إعداد لتيك \SpecialChar LaTeX
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
373 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
374 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
375 installed, but you will not be
376 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
377 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
378 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
379 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
380 document can always be output as plain text
384 \begin_layout Standard
387 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
388 or DocBook classes or packages.
389 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
390 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
393 \begin_layout Standard
396 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
397 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
398 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
401 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
409 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
410 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
413 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
419 \begin_inset Index idx
422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
432 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
439 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
443 \begin_layout Chapter
444 كيف تعمل مع \SpecialChar LyX
448 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset Index idx
453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
462 \begin_layout Standard
469 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
470 in addition to some more advanced operations:
473 \begin_layout Itemize
495 \begin_layout Itemize
511 arg "buffer-new-template"
517 \begin_layout Itemize
539 \begin_layout Itemize
549 \begin_layout Itemize
563 \begin_layout Itemize
585 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-write-as"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
613 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Standard
630 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
631 a few minor differences.
634 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
645 command lists the available templates.
646 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
647 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
648 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
656 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
663 \begin_layout Standard
666 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
699 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
700 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
701 is just that — a big, blank space.
709 \begin_layout Standard
731 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
738 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
741 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
759 will reload the document from disk.
760 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
761 and want to restore it to the last save.
770 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
771 them as your changes.
774 \begin_layout Section
775 عمليات التحرير الأساسية
776 \begin_inset Index idx
779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
788 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
795 \begin_layout Standard
798 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
799 can perform cut and paste operations
800 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
801 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
802 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
803 editing features and how to access
805 We will start with cut and paste.
808 \begin_layout Standard
811 As you might expect, the
815 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
816 various other editing features.
817 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
821 \begin_layout Itemize
823 \begin_inset Index idx
826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
855 \begin_layout Itemize
857 \begin_inset Index idx
860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
889 \begin_layout Itemize
891 \begin_inset Index idx
894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
919 \begin_layout Itemize
929 \begin_layout Itemize
939 \begin_layout Itemize
953 \begin_inset Index idx
956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
965 \begin_inset Index idx
968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
983 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
993 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
999 \begin_layout Standard
1002 The first three are self-explanatory.
1003 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1004 and other programs by
1025 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1026 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1031 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1032 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1033 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1034 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1035 into individual cells.
1039 \begin_inset space ~
1044 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1045 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1049 \begin_layout Standard
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1060 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1062 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1079 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1080 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1081 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1087 \begin_inset space \space{}
1090 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1091 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1094 \begin_inset space ~
1097 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1099 \begin_inset space ~
1103 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1107 \begin_inset space ~
1116 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1117 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1119 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1123 \begin_inset space ~
1128 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1129 start a new paragraph.
1130 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1131 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1136 \begin_inset space ~
1139 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1141 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1145 \begin_inset space ~
1153 \begin_inset space ~
1156 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1159 paste from the primary selection.
1160 This is normally the currently selected text.
1163 \begin_layout Standard
1168 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1186 \begin_inset space ~
1192 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1198 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1201 \begin_inset space ~
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1215 button to skip the current word.
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1224 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1233 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1235 If the toggle is set, searching for
1236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1247 will not match the word
1248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1262 Match whole words only
1264 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1265 to only find complete words, e.
1266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1295 offers also an advanced
1298 \begin_inset space ~
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 feature that is described in section
1308 \begin_inset space ~
1312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1314 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1321 \begin_layout Standard
1324 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1325 \begin_inset space \space{}
1329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1337 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1339 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1344 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1351 \begin_layout Standard
1359 arg "inset-select-all"
1364 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1365 When the cursor is inside an inset
1370 arg "inset-select-all"
1375 selects the content of the inset.
1381 arg "inset-select-all"
1386 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1393 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1398 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1402 \begin_layout Section
1404 \begin_inset Index idx
1407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1414 \begin_inset Index idx
1417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1426 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1433 \begin_layout Standard
1436 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1438 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1441 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1444 or the toolbar button
1454 to undo some mistake.
1455 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1460 or the toolbar button
1471 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1478 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1482 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1488 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1497 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1498 This is a consequence of the 100
1499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1502 step undo limit mentioned above.
1505 \begin_layout Standard
1515 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1517 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1521 \begin_layout Section
1523 \begin_inset Index idx
1526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1535 \begin_layout Standard
1536 هذه أهم عمليات أساسية تقوم بها الفارة
1539 \begin_layout Enumerate
1544 \begin_layout Itemize
1551 once anywhere in the edit window.
1552 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1556 \begin_layout Enumerate
1561 \begin_layout Itemize
1570 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1573 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1576 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1577 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1580 \begin_layout Itemize
1583 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1593 \begin_layout Enumerate
1596 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1600 \begin_layout Standard
1603 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1604 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1608 \begin_layout Section
1610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1612 name "sec:Navigating"
1617 \begin_inset Index idx
1620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1629 \begin_layout Standard
1633 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1636 \begin_layout Itemize
1643 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1644 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1647 \begin_layout Itemize
1650 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1652 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1654 \begin_inset space ~
1659 or by the toolbar button
1664 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1670 \begin_layout Itemize
1673 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1675 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 and use the same menu to return to them.
1679 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1682 \begin_layout Standard
1690 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1697 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1700 \begin_inset space ~
1705 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1706 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1707 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1708 your last editing position.
1711 \begin_layout Standard
1718 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1722 \begin_layout Subsection
1724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1726 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1731 \begin_inset Index idx
1734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1741 \begin_inset Index idx
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1753 \begin_layout Standard
1756 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1757 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1758 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1760 \begin_inset space ~
1764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1766 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1770 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1782 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1786 \begin_layout Standard
1789 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1790 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1791 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1792 dialog and to modify the citation.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1802 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1803 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1805 Labels and References
1807 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1816 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1819 \begin_layout Standard
1822 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1823 you further to control the display.
1828 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1829 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1835 option keeps it in the current view state.
1836 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1837 \begin_inset space ~
1840 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 3, the subsections of sections
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1853 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1858 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1868 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1871 \begin_layout Standard
1884 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1885 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1907 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1908 So, for example, you can move section
1909 \begin_inset space ~
1913 \begin_inset space ~
1916 2.4 or after section
1917 \begin_inset space ~
1922 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1943 (or the corresponding key bindings
1951 ) you can change the level of sections.
1952 So you can for example make section
1953 \begin_inset space ~
1957 \begin_inset space ~
1961 \begin_inset space ~
1967 \begin_layout Standard
1970 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1971 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1974 \begin_layout Subsection
1976 \begin_inset Index idx
1979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1980 الاستكشاف ! الشريط الأفقي
1988 \begin_layout Standard
1992 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1998 \begin_inset space \space{}
2002 \begin_inset space ~
2005 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
2006 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
2007 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2011 \begin_layout Standard
2014 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2018 \begin_layout Itemize
2022 is used on a small tablet computer
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2028 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2042 \begin_inset space ~
2055 \begin_layout Itemize
2058 Math constructs with long command names
2061 \begin_layout Standard
2064 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2065 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2067 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2068 windows so that table
2069 \begin_inset space ~
2073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2075 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2080 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2082 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2083 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2086 \begin_layout Standard
2089 \begin_inset Float table
2095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2098 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2105 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2109 Horizontal scrolling test.
2117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2121 \begin_inset Tabular
2122 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2123 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2126 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2174 \begin_layout Section
2175 الإكمال التلقائي للكلمة
2176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2178 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2183 \begin_inset Index idx
2186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2193 \begin_inset Index idx
2196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2227 \begin_layout Standard
2231 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2233 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2234 is used to propose completions.
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2240 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2243 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2248 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2255 \begin_inset space ~
2259 \begin_inset space ~
2264 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2268 \begin_inset space ~
2273 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2274 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2278 \begin_inset space ~
2284 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2285 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2286 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2287 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2290 \begin_layout Standard
2294 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2295 completions available.
2300 key to accept a proposed completion.
2301 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2302 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2303 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2310 \begin_layout Standard
2313 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2314 ing options for text.
2315 The special math option
2319 enables characters to be composed.
2320 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2321 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2324 , you can then input the characters
2325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2336 to a formula to get it.
2337 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2338 of the math toolbar.
2339 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2343 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2344 's installation folder.
2345 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2354 \begin_layout Section
2355 مفاتيح التحكم الأساسية
2356 \begin_inset Index idx
2359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2366 \begin_inset Index idx
2369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2398 \begin_inset Index idx
2401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2434 \begin_layout Standard
2437 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2451 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2454 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2458 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2459 \begin_inset space ~
2463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2465 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2472 \begin_layout Standard
2478 \begin_inset space ~
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2507 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2511 \begin_layout Labeling
2512 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2516 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2517 LatexCommand nomenclature
2519 description "مفتاح جدولة"
2527 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2529 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2530 \begin_inset space ~
2534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2536 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2543 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2547 , especially section
2548 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2554 reference "subsec:Lists"
2560 If you are still confused, look in the
2565 \begin_inset Newline newline
2573 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2574 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2578 \begin_layout Labeling
2579 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2583 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2584 LatexCommand nomenclature
2586 description "مفتاح الخروج"
2595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2602 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2603 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2606 \begin_layout Labeling
2607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2614 \begin_inset space ~
2618 \begin_inset space ~
2625 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2626 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2630 \begin_layout Standard
2633 There are three modifier keys:
2636 \begin_layout Labeling
2637 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2656 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2657 LatexCommand nomenclature
2659 description "Control key"
2664 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2665 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2669 \begin_layout Itemize
2679 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2682 \begin_layout Itemize
2692 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2695 \begin_layout Itemize
2705 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2709 \begin_layout Labeling
2710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2729 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2730 LatexCommand nomenclature
2732 description "Shift key"
2737 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2738 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2741 \begin_layout Labeling
2742 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2761 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2762 LatexCommand nomenclature
2764 description "Alt or Meta key"
2769 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2770 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2771 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2777 \begin_inset Newline newline
2780 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2782 menu accelerator keys
2785 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2786 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2790 \begin_layout Standard
2793 For example, the sequence
2794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2800 \begin_inset space ~
2804 \begin_inset space ~
2810 \begin_inset space ~
2818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2837 \begin_inset space ~
2843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2853 \begin_layout Standard
2860 manual lists all other things bound to the
2868 \begin_layout Standard
2871 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2873 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2874 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2875 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2876 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2877 The \SpecialChar LyX
2878 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2879 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2880 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2882 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2898 followed by a capital
2905 \begin_layout Chapter
2906 أساسيات ليك \SpecialChar LyX
2908 \begin_inset Index idx
2911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2920 \begin_layout Section
2922 \begin_inset Index idx
2925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2934 \begin_layout Subsection
2938 \begin_layout Standard
2941 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2942 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2943 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2944 numbering schemes, and so on.
2945 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2946 and format the title of your document differently.
2949 \begin_layout Standard
2956 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2957 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2958 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2959 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2960 picks one for you by default.
2961 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2964 \begin_layout Subsection
2966 \begin_inset Index idx
2969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2978 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2985 \begin_layout Standard
2988 You can select a class using the
2990 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2991 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2996 \begin_inset Index idx
2999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3008 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3016 \begin_layout Standard
3019 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3024 \begin_layout Description
3027 Article for basic articles
3030 \begin_layout Description
3033 Report for basic reports
3036 \begin_layout Description
3039 Book for writing a book
3042 \begin_layout Description
3045 Letter for US-style letters
3048 \begin_layout Standard
3051 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3052 only uses if you have installed
3053 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3054 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3055 distributions will include
3057 Here are some of the classes.
3058 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3060 Special Document Classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3072 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3075 \begin_layout Description
3078 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3082 \begin_layout Description
3085 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3089 \begin_layout Description
3092 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3093 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3094 There are three article layouts available.
3095 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3096 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3097 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3098 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3103 sequential numbering
3104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3107 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3108 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3109 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3110 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3113 \begin_layout Description
3116 Beamer Layout for presentations
3119 \begin_layout Description
3122 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3123 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3124 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3125 with \SpecialChar LyX
3129 \begin_layout Description
3132 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3135 \begin_layout Description
3139 \begin_inset space ~
3142 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3145 \begin_layout Description
3148 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3151 \begin_layout Description
3154 Foils Used to make transparencies
3157 \begin_layout Description
3160 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3161 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3162 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3163 with \SpecialChar LyX
3167 \begin_layout Description
3170 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3171 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3174 \begin_layout Description
3177 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3180 \begin_layout Description
3183 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3186 \begin_layout Description
3189 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3190 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3191 (Is used by this document.)
3194 \begin_layout Description
3197 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3200 \begin_layout Description
3203 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3206 \begin_layout Description
3213 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3214 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3216 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3220 \begin_layout Description
3223 Slides Used to make transparencies
3226 \begin_layout Description
3230 \begin_inset space ~
3233 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3234 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3237 \begin_layout Description
3240 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3243 \begin_layout Standard
3246 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3248 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3250 Special Document Classes
3257 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3258 of the document classes.
3261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3265 \begin_layout Standard
3268 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3271 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3275 \begin_inset Index idx
3278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3297 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3298 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3300 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3303 \begin_layout Standard
3308 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3313 , are highly specialized.
3315 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3316 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3317 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3318 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3319 by some document class.
3320 There are just too many of them.
3321 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3324 \begin_layout Standard
3327 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3335 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3336 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3337 document class for a new file.
3339 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3342 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3349 manual for information on how to install them.
3352 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3358 \begin_layout Standard
3361 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3362 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3363 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3364 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 class files to be used for dissertation
3366 s submitted to those universities.
3367 The \SpecialChar LyX
3368 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3370 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3374 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3380 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3387 name "subsec:Modules"
3392 \begin_inset Index idx
3395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3404 \begin_layout Standard
3407 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3408 chosen document class.
3409 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3410 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3417 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3422 \begin_inset Index idx
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3438 \begin_layout Standard
3441 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3442 packages or file format converters that are not always
3443 installed by default.
3445 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3446 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3447 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3448 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3450 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3451 file without the missing prerequisites.
3452 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3453 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3461 \begin_inset Index idx
3464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3472 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3477 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3480 \begin_layout Standard
3483 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3492 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3494 will advise you about these things.
3502 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3504 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3506 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3511 \begin_inset Index idx
3514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3523 \begin_layout Standard
3526 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3527 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3528 : They are intended to be used in
3529 a variety of different documents.
3530 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3531 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3532 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3533 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3534 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3536 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3554 manual for information on how to use it.
3557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3561 \begin_layout Standard
3562 كل نوع من المستندات لها خصائص افتراضية.
3563 وهنا جدول بسيط يقارن بينها:
3566 \begin_layout Standard
3567 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3573 \begin_layout Standard
3575 \begin_inset Tabular
3576 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3577 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3579 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3580 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3581 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3582 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3588 \begin_inset space ~
3596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3864 \begin_layout Standard
3865 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3871 \begin_layout Standard
3874 You're probably also wondering what
3875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3879 \begin_inset space ~
3883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3887 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3888 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3893 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3898 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3908 headings, there are also
3916 headings, and so on.
3917 We will describe these headings fully in section
3920 \begin_inset space ~
3924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3926 reference "subsec:Headings"
3933 \begin_layout Subsection
3935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3937 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3942 \begin_inset Index idx
3945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 \begin_inset Index idx
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3964 \begin_layout Standard
3967 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3969 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3976 \begin_inset space ~
3984 \begin_inset space ~
3989 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3991 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3992 doesn't support special options you want to
3993 use for your document.
3994 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3995 -class and its options, you have to read
3999 \begin_layout Standard
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4018 \begin_inset space ~
4023 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4024 You can choose between the following five options:
4027 \begin_layout Labeling
4028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 يستخدم أسلوب الصفحة الافتراضي لهذا المستند.
4036 \begin_layout Labeling
4037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4042 بدون ترقيم للصفحات أو عناوين.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 \begin_layout Labeling
4055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4060 ترقيم للصفحات وفصول وأقسام مرقمة.
4061 وهذا يتوقف على الحد الأعلى من المستويات الذي يسمح به نوع المستوى المستخدم.
4064 \begin_layout Labeling
4065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4070 هذا يسمح لك بتخصيص كامل للراس والتذييل إذا كنت ركبت حزمة
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
4085 والتي شرحت بشكل مفصل في القسم
4086 \begin_inset space ~
4090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4092 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4099 \begin_layout Standard
4102 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4105 \begin_inset space ~
4109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4111 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4118 \begin_layout Subsection
4120 \begin_inset Index idx
4123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4132 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4139 \begin_layout Standard
4142 You can find the following options in the menu
4145 \begin_inset space ~
4152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4158 \begin_inset Index idx
4161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4170 \begin_layout Labeling
4171 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4176 \begin_inset space ~
4181 What size paper to print on.
4186 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4214 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 US letter, US legal, US executive
4221 \begin_layout Itemize
4228 \begin_layout Itemize
4236 \begin_layout Labeling
4237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4243 To choose whether to output as
4254 \begin_layout Labeling
4255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4260 \begin_inset space ~
4265 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4266 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4269 \begin_layout Subsection
4271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4273 name "subsec:Margins"
4278 \begin_inset Index idx
4281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4288 \begin_inset Index idx
4291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4300 \begin_layout Standard
4303 Paper margins are set in the menu
4305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4310 \begin_inset Index idx
4313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4322 \begin_layout Standard
4325 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4326 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4327 the paper format and the font size into account.
4330 \begin_layout Subsection
4334 \begin_layout Standard
4337 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4343 That includes the paragraph environments.
4344 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4345 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4346 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4348 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4357 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4359 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4360 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4361 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4364 \begin_layout Section
4365 بادئة الفقرة والفاصلة
4366 \begin_inset Index idx
4369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4378 \begin_layout Subsection
4380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4382 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4389 \begin_layout Standard
4392 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4393 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4396 \begin_layout Standard
4399 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4400 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4401 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4402 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4406 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4412 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4413 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4414 language than English.
4416 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4419 \begin_layout Standard
4422 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4423 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4424 into \SpecialChar LyX
4426 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4429 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4431 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4432 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4433 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4442 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4443 goes to produce a printable file.
4448 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4450 gives you the ability globally to change
4454 these pre-coded spacings.
4455 We will explain more later.
4458 \begin_layout Subsection
4460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4462 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4467 \begin_inset Index idx
4470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4479 \begin_layout Standard
4489 \begin_inset space ~
4497 \begin_inset space ~
4504 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4509 \begin_inset Index idx
4512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4520 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4527 \begin_layout Standard
4530 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4533 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4535 \begin_inset space ~
4540 dialog and toggle the
4543 \begin_inset space ~
4548 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4553 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4559 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4560 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4564 \begin_layout Standard
4567 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4568 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4571 \begin_layout Subsection
4573 \begin_inset Index idx
4576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4585 \begin_layout Standard
4590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4594 \begin_inset Index idx
4597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4606 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4610 \begin_inset space ~
4619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4622 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4629 \begin_inset Index idx
4632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4633 حزمة لتيك ! setspace
4640 installed to use this feature.
4645 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4647 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4649 \begin_inset space ~
4654 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4655 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4658 \begin_layout Section
4660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4662 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4667 \begin_inset Index idx
4670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4677 \begin_inset Index idx
4680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4689 \begin_layout Subsection
4693 \begin_layout Standard
4696 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4699 \begin_layout Standard
4709 } \SpecialChar ldots
4719 \begin_inset Newline newline
4722 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4724 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4725 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4726 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4735 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4738 \begin_layout Standard
4741 A paragraph environment is simply a
4742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4749 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4750 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4751 scheme, labels, and so on.
4752 Additionally, you can
4753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4760 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4761 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4762 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4763 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4765 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4767 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4770 \begin_layout Standard
4773 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4776 \begin_inset Graphics
4777 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4785 at the left end of the toolbar.
4787 will change the environment of the
4791 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4792 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4793 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4797 \begin_layout Standard
4808 create a new paragraph using the
4812 paragraph environment.
4814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4821 because if you are in one of these environments:
4824 \begin_layout Itemize
4830 \begin_layout Itemize
4836 \begin_layout Itemize
4842 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 \begin_layout Itemize
4854 \begin_layout Itemize
4860 \begin_layout Itemize
4866 \begin_layout Standard
4870 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4874 , rather than resetting it to
4879 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4880 \begin_inset space ~
4884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4886 reference "sec:Nesting"
4893 \begin_layout Subsection
4897 \begin_layout Standard
4900 The default paragraph environment is
4905 It creates a plain paragraph.
4907 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4908 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4909 this manual) are in the
4916 \begin_layout Standard
4919 You can nest a paragraph using the
4923 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4931 \begin_layout Subsection
4933 \begin_inset Index idx
4936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4948 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4949 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4951 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4958 for thanks or contact information.
4959 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4960 places all of this on a separate page
4961 along with today's date.
4962 For other types of documents, the title
4963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4970 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4974 \begin_layout Standard
4978 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4992 Here's how you use them:
4995 \begin_layout Itemize
4998 Put the title of your document in the
5005 \begin_layout Itemize
5008 Put the author name in the
5015 \begin_layout Itemize
5018 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5019 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5025 Note that using this environment is optional.
5026 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5027 will automatically insert today's date.
5028 If you don't want a date, use the option
5030 Suppress default date on front page
5034 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5035 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5037 \begin_inset space ~
5045 \begin_layout Standard
5048 You can use footnotes to insert
5049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5056 or contact information.
5059 \begin_layout Subsection
5061 \begin_inset Index idx
5064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5073 name "subsec:Headings"
5080 \begin_layout Standard
5083 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5085 takes care of the numbering for you.
5088 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5090 \begin_inset Index idx
5093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5094 عنونة الأقسام ! ترقيم
5102 \begin_layout Standard
5105 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5109 \begin_layout Enumerate
5116 \begin_layout Enumerate
5123 \begin_layout Enumerate
5130 \begin_layout Enumerate
5137 \begin_layout Enumerate
5144 \begin_layout Enumerate
5151 \begin_layout Enumerate
5158 \begin_layout Standard
5162 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5163 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5164 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5167 \begin_layout Standard
5170 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5171 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5172 You group the book into chapters.
5174 does a similar grouping:
5177 \begin_layout Itemize
5183 is divided into either
5194 \begin_layout Itemize
5207 \begin_layout Itemize
5220 \begin_layout Itemize
5233 \begin_layout Itemize
5246 \begin_layout Itemize
5259 \begin_layout Standard
5262 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5271 Not all document types use the
5275 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5280 is the top-level heading.
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5295 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5296 labels it with its number,
5297 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5299 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5312 العناوين غير المرقمة
5313 \begin_inset Index idx
5316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5317 عنونة الأقسام ! غير مرقم
5325 \begin_layout Standard
5328 The unnumbered section headings have a
5329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5336 at the end of their name.
5337 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5338 the table of contents, see section
5339 \begin_inset space ~
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5356 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5363 \begin_layout Standard
5366 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5367 in the Table of Contents.
5368 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5370 Just as certain classes start with
5384 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5394 This is something you can change.
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5408 \begin_inset Index idx
5411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5422 \begin_inset space ~
5426 \begin_inset space ~
5431 you will see two counters.
5436 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5437 numbers a section heading.
5438 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5444 \begin_inset Index idx
5447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5448 عنونة الأقسام ! عنوان قصير
5454 \begin_inset Argument 1
5457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5468 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5475 \begin_layout Standard
5478 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5479 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5480 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5481 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5484 \begin_layout Standard
5488 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5489 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5490 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5491 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5496 \begin_inset space ~
5502 This will insert a box labeled
5503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5507 \begin_inset space ~
5511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5514 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5515 This also works for captions inside floats.
5516 There can only be one short title per title.
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5522 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5532 The following information applies to all section headings:
5535 \begin_layout Itemize
5538 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5541 \begin_layout Itemize
5544 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5550 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5553 \begin_layout Itemize
5556 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5559 \begin_layout Subsection
5563 \begin_layout Standard
5567 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5581 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5582 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5583 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5584 the text they contain.
5585 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5593 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5596 \begin_layout Standard
5599 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5608 when you start a new paragraph.
5609 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5613 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5614 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5615 have to change back to the
5619 environment yourself.
5622 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5623 الاقتباس والاقتباس الطويل
5624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5631 \begin_inset Index idx
5634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5643 \begin_layout Standard
5646 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5647 time for the differences.
5656 are identical except for one difference:
5660 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5669 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5672 \begin_layout Standard
5675 Here's an example of the
5690 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5692 See – no indentation!
5698 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5699 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5700 the other paragraph.
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5706 Here's another example, this time in the
5713 \begin_layout Quotation
5721 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5722 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5723 the first line, then
5727 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5731 you were quoting other text.
5734 \begin_layout Quotation
5737 Here's a new paragraph.
5738 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5739 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5745 As the examples show,
5749 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5750 They should put quotes in the
5755 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5759 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5762 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5764 \begin_inset Index idx
5767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5774 \begin_inset Index idx
5777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5793 \begin_layout Standard
5799 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5807 \begin_inset Newline newline
5810 Which I did not rehearse!
5816 It could be much worse.
5817 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5819 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5820 indented a bit more than the first.
5821 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5829 \begin_inset Newline newline
5832 And make things look fine
5833 \begin_inset Newline newline
5841 arg "newline-insert newline"
5847 \begin_layout Standard
5854 does not indent both margins.
5855 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5856 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5861 arg "newline-insert newline"
5867 \begin_layout Subsection
5869 \begin_inset Index idx
5872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5888 \begin_layout Standard
5892 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5902 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5903 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5912 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5913 lets you provide your own label.
5914 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5915 describing some general features of all four of them.
5918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5922 \begin_layout Standard
5925 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5927 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5928 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5937 reset the environment to
5941 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5942 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5943 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5949 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5955 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5962 \begin_layout Standard
5965 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5966 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5967 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5969 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5970 you read all of section
5973 \begin_inset space ~
5977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5979 reference "sec:Nesting"
5986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5988 \begin_inset Index idx
5991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6007 \begin_layout Standard
6010 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6014 paragraph environment.
6015 It has the following properties:
6018 \begin_layout Itemize
6021 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6025 \begin_layout Itemize
6029 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6032 \begin_layout Itemize
6035 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6039 \begin_layout Itemize
6042 The items can have any length.
6044 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6045 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6052 \begin_layout Itemize
6059 environment inside another
6063 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6067 \begin_layout Itemize
6070 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6073 \begin_layout Itemize
6077 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6080 \begin_layout Itemize
6084 \begin_inset space ~
6088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6090 reference "sec:Nesting"
6094 for a full explanation of nesting.
6098 \begin_layout Standard
6101 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6110 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6113 \begin_layout Standard
6116 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6117 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6120 \begin_layout Itemize
6123 The label for the first level
6127 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6131 \begin_layout Itemize
6134 The label for the second level is a dash.
6138 \begin_layout Itemize
6141 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6145 \begin_layout Itemize
6148 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6152 \begin_layout Itemize
6155 Back out to the third level.
6159 \begin_layout Itemize
6162 Back to the second level.
6166 \begin_layout Itemize
6169 Back to the outermost level.
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6175 These are the default labels for an
6180 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6185 dialog in the submenu
6191 \begin_inset Index idx
6194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6202 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6206 \begin_layout Standard
6209 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6210 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6212 \begin_inset space ~
6216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6218 reference "sec:Nesting"
6225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6227 \begin_inset Index idx
6230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6239 name "sec:Enumerate"
6246 \begin_layout Standard
6253 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6254 It has these properties:
6257 \begin_layout Enumerate
6260 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6264 \begin_layout Enumerate
6267 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6271 \begin_layout Enumerate
6275 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6278 \begin_layout Enumerate
6285 environment resets the counter to one.
6288 \begin_layout Enumerate
6303 \begin_layout Enumerate
6306 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6307 Items can have any length.
6310 \begin_layout Enumerate
6313 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6316 \begin_layout Enumerate
6319 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6322 \begin_layout Enumerate
6325 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6329 \begin_layout Standard
6340 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6342 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6343 labels the four different levels in an
6350 \begin_layout Enumerate
6353 The first level of an
6357 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6361 \begin_layout Enumerate
6364 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6368 \begin_layout Enumerate
6371 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6375 \begin_layout Enumerate
6378 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6381 \begin_layout Enumerate
6384 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6389 \begin_layout Enumerate
6392 Back to the third level
6396 \begin_layout Enumerate
6399 Back to the second level.
6403 \begin_layout Enumerate
6406 Back to the outermost level.
6409 \begin_layout Standard
6412 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6416 environment, see section
6417 \begin_inset space ~
6421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6423 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6428 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6432 \begin_layout Standard
6435 There is more to nesting
6439 environments than we've stated here.
6440 You should read section
6441 \begin_inset space ~
6445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6447 reference "sec:Nesting"
6451 to learn more about nesting.
6454 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6456 \begin_inset Index idx
6459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6468 \begin_layout Standard
6471 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6475 list has no fixed label.
6476 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6485 of the first line as the label.
6489 \begin_layout Description
6492 Example: This is an example of the
6499 \begin_layout Standard
6503 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6507 \begin_layout Standard
6511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6518 it is meant that the first usage of the
6522 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6524 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6534 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6542 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6544 \begin_inset space ~
6550 \begin_inset space ~
6554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6556 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6560 for more information.) Here is an example:
6563 \begin_layout Description
6567 \begin_inset space ~
6570 Example: This one shows how to use a
6573 \begin_inset space ~
6585 \begin_layout Description
6588 Usage: You should use the
6592 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6593 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6595 It's not a good idea to use a
6599 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6600 You're better off using
6612 paragraphs into them.
6615 \begin_layout Description
6618 Nesting: You can nest
6622 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6626 \begin_layout Standard
6629 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6630 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6631 them from the first line.
6634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6636 \begin_inset Index idx
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_layout Standard
6655 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6656 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6660 \begin_layout Standard
6671 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6673 Here are its properties:
6676 \begin_layout Labeling
6677 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6681 \begin_inset space ~
6684 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6693 of each line as the item label.
6698 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6699 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6700 space as described above.
6703 \begin_layout Labeling
6704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6707 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6708 uses different margins for the item label and the
6709 body of the item text.
6710 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6711 label width plus a little extra space.
6715 \begin_layout Labeling
6716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6720 \begin_inset space ~
6723 width \SpecialChar LyX
6724 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6725 If the label width is larger, the label
6726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6733 into the first line.
6734 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6735 margin of the rest of the item text.
6738 \begin_layout Labeling
6739 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6743 \begin_inset space ~
6746 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6751 environment has the same left margin.
6752 \begin_inset Newline newline
6755 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6758 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6760 \begin_inset space ~
6765 dialog (toolbar button
6770 arg "layout-paragraph"
6779 \begin_inset space ~
6784 determines the default label width.
6785 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6794 multiple times instead.
6795 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6805 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6808 \begin_inset space ~
6813 every time you alter a label in a
6818 \begin_inset Newline newline
6821 The predefined default width is the length of
6822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6830 \begin_inset space ~
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6843 list the same way as the
6847 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6853 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6857 \begin_layout Standard
6864 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6865 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6867 \begin_inset space ~
6871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6873 reference "sec:Nesting"
6877 to learn about nesting.
6880 \begin_layout Standard
6883 There is yet another feature of the
6887 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6888 left-justifies the item labels by
6890 You can use additional
6894 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6895 justifies the item label.
6900 are documented in section
6901 \begin_inset space ~
6905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6907 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6912 Here are some examples:
6915 \begin_layout Labeling
6916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6919 Left The default for
6926 \begin_layout Labeling
6927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6930 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6937 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6940 \begin_layout Labeling
6941 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6944 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6948 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6955 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6958 \begin_layout Subsection
6960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6962 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6967 \begin_inset Index idx
6970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6979 \begin_layout Standard
6982 The features described in this section require that the module
6984 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6986 is loaded in the document settings.
6987 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6995 \begin_inset Index idx
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
7007 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7008 الترقيم العددي المخصص
7009 \begin_inset Index idx
7012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7021 \begin_layout Standard
7025 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7028 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7031 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7032 There you add the command
7035 \begin_layout Standard
7044 \begin_layout Standard
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7066 Code, look at section
7067 \begin_inset space ~
7071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7073 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7086 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7093 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7094 For capital Roman numerals replace
7106 in the command above.
7107 For Arabic numerals use
7115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7122 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7137 \begin_layout Standard
7141 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7150 You can only number 26
7151 \begin_inset space ~
7154 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7162 \begin_layout Standard
7165 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7166 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7169 \begin_layout Standard
7172 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7175 \begin_layout Enumerate
7178 \begin_inset Argument 1
7181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7209 \begin_layout Enumerate
7212 \begin_inset Argument 1
7215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7240 \begin_layout Enumerate
7247 \begin_layout Enumerate
7250 \begin_inset Argument 1
7253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7279 \begin_layout Enumerate
7282 \begin_inset Argument 1
7285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7313 \begin_layout Standard
7316 For this list these commands were used:
7319 \begin_layout Standard
7331 \begin_inset Newline newline
7339 \begin_inset Newline newline
7347 \begin_inset Newline newline
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7366 makes the label emphasized and
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7378 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7387 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7388 lists until you change the definition.
7396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7398 \begin_inset Index idx
7401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7402 ترقيم ! عددي ! استئناف
7410 \begin_layout Standard
7413 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7416 \begin_layout Enumerate
7419 \begin_inset Argument 1
7422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7443 \begin_inset Note Note
7446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 goes back to default numbering
7457 \begin_layout Enumerate
7463 \begin_layout Standard
7469 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7475 \begin_layout Standard
7478 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7483 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7484 to indicate that it is a resumed
7485 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7486 , but in the output.
7489 \begin_layout Standard
7492 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7501 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7510 \begin_layout Standard
7513 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7515 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7516 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7517 of a normal enumeration.
7518 There, insert the command
7521 \begin_layout Standard
7528 \begin_layout Standard
7535 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7539 \begin_layout Enumerate
7543 \begin_layout Enumerate
7547 \begin_layout Standard
7550 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7553 \begin_layout Enumerate
7556 \begin_inset Argument 1
7559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7577 This enumeration starts at 4
7580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7582 \begin_inset Index idx
7585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7594 \begin_layout Standard
7597 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7599 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7602 \begin_layout Itemize
7608 \begin_layout Itemize
7611 with standard spacing
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7617 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7619 Add there the command
7623 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7626 \begin_layout Itemize
7627 \begin_inset Argument 1
7630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7651 \begin_layout Itemize
7657 \begin_layout Itemize
7663 \begin_layout Standard
7666 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7674 \begin_inset Index idx
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7678 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
7686 For more information see its documentation
7689 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7699 \begin_layout Standard
7702 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7704 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7705 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7709 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7712 \begin_layout Enumerate
7713 \begin_inset Argument 1
7716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7724 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7739 \begin_layout Enumerate
7742 with negative indentation
7745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7747 \begin_inset Index idx
7750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7759 \begin_layout Standard
7762 You can also change the style of description lists.
7766 \begin_layout Standard
7773 \begin_layout Standard
7776 changes the description label font, the command
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7789 sets the list style.
7792 \begin_layout Standard
7795 An example where the command
7798 \begin_layout Standard
7804 itshape, style=nextline
7807 \begin_layout Standard
7813 \begin_layout Description
7817 \begin_inset space ~
7821 \begin_inset Argument 1
7824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7832 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7834 itshape, style=nextline
7844 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7845 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7849 \begin_layout Description
7853 \begin_inset space ~
7856 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7857 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7858 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7861 \begin_layout Standard
7864 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7872 \begin_inset Index idx
7875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7876 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
7884 For more information see its documentation
7887 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7897 \begin_layout Subsection
7899 \begin_inset Index idx
7902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7912 العنوان والعنوان الأيمن: نظرة عامة
7915 \begin_layout Standard
7918 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7919 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7927 \begin_inset space ~
7933 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7934 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7935 gags on the document.
7936 In contrast, you can use the
7943 \begin_inset space ~
7948 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7949 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7953 \begin_layout Standard
7956 Of course, you're not limited to using
7963 \begin_inset space ~
7972 \begin_inset space ~
7977 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7978 some European academic papers.
7981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7985 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7992 \begin_layout Standard
7999 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8000 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8004 \begin_inset space ~
8009 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8010 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8011 Here's an example of each:
8014 \begin_layout Right Address
8018 \begin_inset Newline newline
8022 \begin_inset Newline newline
8026 \begin_inset Newline newline
8029 When is it? What is today?
8032 \begin_layout Standard
8038 \begin_inset space ~
8044 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8046 the largest block of text on a single line.
8047 Here's an example of the
8054 \begin_layout Address
8058 \begin_inset Newline newline
8061 Where do I send this
8062 \begin_inset Newline newline
8065 Your post office and country
8068 \begin_layout Standard
8071 As you can see, both
8078 \begin_inset space ~
8083 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8088 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8089 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8095 This makes sense, since
8103 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8104 Thus, you have to use
8113 arg "newline-insert newline"
8120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8121 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8123 \begin_inset space ~
8127 \begin_inset space ~
8132 ) to start a new line in an
8139 \begin_inset space ~
8147 \begin_layout Subsection
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8154 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8155 or list of references.
8157 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8162 \begin_inset Index idx
8165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8183 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8184 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8185 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8186 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8200 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8201 The book document classes ignores the
8205 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8209 in a letter document class.
8212 \begin_layout Standard
8219 environment does several things for you.
8220 First, it puts the centered label
8221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8229 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8231 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8232 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8233 the subsequent text.
8234 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8236 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8240 \begin_layout Standard
8243 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8247 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8248 The new paragraph will still be in the
8253 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8254 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8257 \begin_layout Standard
8260 \begin_inset Float figure
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8267 \begin_inset Graphics
8268 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
8275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8278 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8285 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8306 \begin_layout Standard
8309 We would love to demonstrate the
8313 environment, but since this document is in the
8314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8321 class, we can't do this.
8322 We inserted it therefore as figure
8323 \begin_inset space ~
8327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8329 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8334 If you have never heard of an
8335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8342 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8347 \begin_inset Index idx
8350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8359 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8366 \begin_layout Standard
8373 environment is used to list references.
8374 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8375 only use it at the end of the document.
8387 \begin_layout Standard
8390 When you first open a
8394 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8395 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8411 depending on the document class.
8412 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8413 Each paragraph of the
8417 environment is a bibliography entry.
8422 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8423 Each new paragraph is still in the
8430 \begin_layout Standard
8433 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8434 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8436 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8438 handling, have a look at section
8441 \begin_inset space ~
8445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8447 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8454 \begin_layout Subsection
8458 \begin_layout Standard
8462 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8463 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8467 كود - ليك \SpecialChar LyX
8469 \begin_inset Index idx
8472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8481 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8488 \begin_layout Standard
8496 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8498 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8503 key as a fixed whitespace.
8507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8522 \begin_inset space ~
8527 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8545 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8548 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8553 arg "newline-insert newline"
8572 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8573 So, when you finish using the
8578 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8579 Also, you can nest the
8584 environment inside of others.
8587 \begin_layout Standard
8590 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 arg "newline-insert newline"
8606 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8611 \begin_inset space \space{}
8623 arg "newline-insert newline"
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8639 arg "newline-insert newline"
8653 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8665 You must put at least one
8669 in any line you want blank.
8670 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8681 since that will insert
8686 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8691 arg "self-insert \""
8697 \begin_layout Standard
8703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8709 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8715 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8721 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8727 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8730 printf("Hello World!
8735 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8741 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8747 \begin_layout Standard
8750 This is just the standard
8751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8762 \begin_layout Standard
8769 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8771 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8772 as if you used a typewriter
8775 \begin_inset Index idx
8778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8789 Program Code Listings
8794 \begin_inset space ~
8802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8804 \begin_inset Index idx
8807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8816 \begin_layout Standard
8823 environment is similar to the
8828 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8829 computer console text.
8834 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8848 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8849 you can have empty lines.
8862 \begin_layout Itemize
8865 have a certain language and a text style
8868 \begin_layout Itemize
8871 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8872 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8873 and \SpecialChar TeX
8877 \begin_layout Standard
8880 Because of these properties
8884 works like a typewriter.
8888 \begin_layout Verbatim
8892 \begin_layout Verbatim
8895 The following 2 lines are empty:
8898 \begin_layout Verbatim
8902 \begin_layout Verbatim
8906 \begin_layout Verbatim
8907 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8919 environment is identical to
8923 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8924 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8931 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8935 \begin_layout Section
8937 \begin_inset Index idx
8940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8956 \begin_layout Subsection
8960 \begin_layout Standard
8964 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8966 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8968 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8970 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8982 \begin_layout Enumerate
8988 \begin_layout Enumerate
8995 \begin_layout Enumerate
9001 \begin_layout Enumerate
9008 \begin_layout Enumerate
9014 \begin_layout Standard
9017 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9018 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9020 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9022 \begin_inset space ~
9026 \begin_inset space ~
9034 \begin_inset space ~
9038 \begin_inset space ~
9043 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9045 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9050 arg "depth-increment"
9060 arg "depth-decrement"
9078 arg "depth-increment"
9088 arg "depth-decrement"
9094 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9095 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9099 \begin_layout Standard
9102 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9103 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9104 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9105 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9106 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9109 \begin_layout Standard
9112 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9114 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9116 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9119 \begin_layout Subsection
9120 ما الذي تستطيع تفريخه وما لا تستطيع
9123 \begin_layout Standard
9126 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9127 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9130 \begin_layout Standard
9133 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9134 than a simple yes or no.
9135 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9138 \begin_layout Itemize
9141 Completely unnestable
9144 \begin_layout Itemize
9147 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9151 \begin_layout Itemize
9154 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9161 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9162 environments have them:
9165 \begin_layout Description
9169 \begin_inset space ~
9177 \begin_inset space ~
9182 للتفريخ لا يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
9183 ولا يمكن التفريخ داخله.
9187 \begin_layout Itemize
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9199 \begin_layout Itemize
9205 \begin_layout Itemize
9211 \begin_layout Itemize
9218 \begin_layout Description
9220 \begin_inset space ~
9223 كامل يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
9224 ويمكن التفريخ داخله.
9228 \begin_layout Itemize
9234 \begin_layout Itemize
9240 \begin_layout Itemize
9246 \begin_layout Itemize
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9258 \begin_layout Itemize
9264 \begin_layout Itemize
9270 \begin_layout Itemize
9276 \begin_layout Itemize
9282 \begin_layout Itemize
9289 \begin_layout Description
9291 \begin_inset space ~
9294 طفيلي يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
9295 ولا يمكن التفريخ داخله.
9299 \begin_layout Itemize
9305 \begin_layout Itemize
9311 \begin_layout Itemize
9317 \begin_layout Itemize
9323 \begin_layout Itemize
9329 \begin_layout Itemize
9335 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Itemize
9347 \begin_layout Itemize
9353 \begin_layout Itemize
9359 \begin_layout Itemize
9365 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Itemize
9381 \begin_inset space ~
9387 \begin_layout Itemize
9394 \begin_layout Standard
9397 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9406 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9416 \begin_inset space ~
9419 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9420 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9421 nested section headings violate this.
9429 \begin_layout Subsection
9430 تفريخ أشياء أخرى: الجداول، الرياضيات، التعويم، إلخ.
9431 \begin_inset Index idx
9434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9435 تفريخ ! الجداول إلخ.
9443 \begin_layout Standard
9446 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9447 affected by nesting anyhow.
9451 \begin_layout Itemize
9455 \begin_layout Itemize
9459 \begin_layout Itemize
9463 \begin_layout Standard
9467 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9476 Figures and tables in
9480 are not affected by this.
9485 Have a look at section
9488 \begin_inset space ~
9492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9494 reference "sec:Floats"
9500 for more information about
9507 \begin_layout Standard
9511 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9512 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9516 \begin_layout Standard
9519 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9527 of its own, it behaves just like a
9528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9535 paragraph environment.
9536 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9540 \begin_layout Standard
9543 Here's an example with a table:
9546 \begin_layout Enumerate
9553 \begin_layout Enumerate
9556 This is (a) and it's nested.
9560 \begin_layout Standard
9561 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9567 \begin_layout Standard
9569 \begin_inset Tabular
9570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9571 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9573 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9621 \begin_layout Standard
9622 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9629 \begin_layout Enumerate
9633 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9637 \begin_layout Enumerate
9643 \begin_layout Standard
9646 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9649 \begin_layout Enumerate
9656 \begin_layout Enumerate
9659 This is (a) and it's nested.
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9670 \begin_layout Standard
9672 \begin_inset Tabular
9673 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9674 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9675 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9676 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9724 \begin_layout Standard
9725 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9731 \begin_layout Enumerate
9740 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9743 \begin_layout Enumerate
9749 \begin_layout Standard
9752 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9756 \begin_layout Standard
9759 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9762 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9765 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 \begin_layout Enumerate
9775 This is (a) and it's nested.
9778 \begin_layout Standard
9779 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9785 \begin_layout Standard
9787 \begin_inset Tabular
9788 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9789 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9790 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9791 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9840 \begin_layout Standard
9841 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9847 \begin_layout Enumerate
9851 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9858 \begin_layout Enumerate
9864 \begin_layout Standard
9867 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9873 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9874 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9878 \begin_layout Subsection
9879 الاستخدام والميزات العامة
9882 \begin_layout Standard
9885 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9886 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9895 is the innermost possible depth.
9896 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9899 \begin_layout Enumerate
9902 level #1 – outermost
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 \begin_layout Enumerate
9920 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 \begin_layout Itemize
9934 \begin_layout Itemize
9945 \begin_layout Standard
9948 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9949 both of them in the example.
9950 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9960 For example, if we tried to nest another
9965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9972 , we would get errors.
9975 \begin_layout Subsection
9977 \begin_inset Index idx
9980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9989 \begin_layout Standard
9992 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9993 We have several examples of nested environments.
9994 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9999 مثال 1: الطية السادسة والتفريخ المختلط
10002 \begin_layout Labeling
10003 \labelwidthstring MMM
10006 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10015 \begin_layout Labeling
10016 \labelwidthstring MMM
10019 #2-a This is level #2.
10020 We created it by using
10025 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10035 arg "depth-increment"
10044 \begin_layout Labeling
10045 \labelwidthstring MMM
10048 #3-a This is level #3.
10049 This time, we just enter
10058 arg "depth-increment"
10064 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10070 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10080 arg "depth-increment"
10089 \begin_layout Standard
10096 environment, nested inside of
10097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10105 So, it's at level #4.
10106 We did this by entering
10111 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10121 arg "depth-increment"
10126 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10131 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10147 \begin_layout Standard
10154 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10159 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10167 \begin_layout Labeling
10168 \labelwidthstring MMM
10171 #4-a This is level #4.
10177 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10182 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10187 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10191 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10196 keep nesting things inside
10197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10208 \begin_layout Labeling
10209 \labelwidthstring MMM
10212 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10217 \begin_layout Labeling
10218 \labelwidthstring MMM
10221 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10222 and this is level #6.
10223 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10227 \begin_layout Labeling
10228 \labelwidthstring MMM
10231 #5-b Back to level #5.
10237 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10247 arg "depth-decrement"
10256 \begin_layout Labeling
10257 \labelwidthstring MMM
10265 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10275 arg "depth-decrement"
10280 , we're back at level #4.
10284 \begin_layout Labeling
10285 \labelwidthstring MMM
10288 #3-b Back to level #3.
10289 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10293 \begin_layout Labeling
10294 \labelwidthstring MMM
10297 #2-b Back to level #2.
10302 \begin_layout Labeling
10303 \labelwidthstring MMM
10306 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10307 After this sentence, we will enter
10311 and change the paragraph environment back to
10318 \begin_layout Standard
10321 We could have also used the
10337 environment in place of the
10342 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10349 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10352 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10355 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10368 arg "depth-increment"
10374 \begin_inset Newline newline
10377 which, we will change to the
10385 \begin_layout Enumerate
10392 environment, at level #2.
10395 \begin_layout Enumerate
10398 Notice how the nested
10402 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10406 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10410 \begin_layout Standard
10413 We ended this example by entering
10418 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10422 and reset the nesting depth by using
10427 arg "depth-decrement"
10435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10436 مثال 3: الملصقات، المستويات، وبيئة التعداد النقطي والرقمي
10437 \begin_inset Argument 1
10440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10443 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10451 \begin_layout Enumerate
10454 This is level #1, in an
10458 paragraph environment.
10459 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10463 \begin_layout Enumerate
10472 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10482 arg "depth-increment"
10488 Now, what happens if we nest an
10492 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10493 label be? An asterisk?
10497 \begin_layout Itemize
10509 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10510 So, its label is a bullet.
10511 (We got here by using
10516 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10526 arg "depth-increment"
10531 , then changing the environment to
10539 \begin_layout Itemize
10542 Here's level #4, produced using
10547 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10557 arg "depth-increment"
10563 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10568 \begin_layout Enumerate
10572 to get to level #5.
10573 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10578 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10582 , because we are in the
10590 environment (that is, it is an
10605 \begin_layout Enumerate
10612 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10613 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10617 \begin_layout Enumerate
10620 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10625 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10630 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10633 \begin_layout Enumerate
10641 arg "depth-decrement"
10646 to decrease the depth after the next
10651 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10658 \begin_layout Enumerate
10662 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10667 \begin_layout Enumerate
10671 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10672 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10676 \begin_layout Enumerate
10679 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10688 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10693 reset the counter for the label.
10697 \begin_layout Enumerate
10705 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10711 arg "depth-decrement"
10716 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10717 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10718 into the twofold-nested
10726 \begin_layout Enumerate
10729 The same thing happens if we do another
10734 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10740 arg "depth-decrement"
10745 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10748 \begin_layout Standard
10751 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10756 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10767 The number of other
10771 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10778 The same rule applies for the
10782 environment, as well.
10785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10786 مثال 4: الذهاب للجنون
10789 \begin_layout Enumerate
10792 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10793 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10794 the same detail with how we did it.
10803 \begin_layout Standard
10814 arg "depth-increment"
10822 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10823 the example in parentheses someplace.
10824 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10825 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10826 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10830 \begin_layout Enumerate
10837 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10841 \begin_layout Verse
10844 Now we will add verse.
10845 \begin_inset Newline newline
10848 It will get much worse.
10849 \begin_inset Newline newline
10860 arg "depth-increment"
10871 \begin_layout Verse
10874 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10875 \begin_inset Newline newline
10878 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10879 \begin_inset Newline newline
10887 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10895 \begin_layout Verse
10898 Here comes a table:
10902 \begin_layout Standard
10905 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10911 \begin_layout Standard
10915 \begin_inset Tabular
10916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10917 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11008 \begin_layout Verse
11016 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11028 arg "depth-increment"
11038 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11045 \begin_inset Newline newline
11054 arg "depth-decrement"
11063 \begin_layout Enumerate
11070 : level #1) This is another item.
11071 Note that selecting a
11075 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
11076 3 times to put the table inside the
11084 \begin_layout Quotation
11087 We're now ending the
11091 list and changing to
11096 We're still at level #1.
11097 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11098 The next set of paragraphs is a
11099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11106 We will nest both the
11113 \begin_inset space ~
11118 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
11122 for the letter body.
11128 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11133 to preserve the depth.
11134 Remember that you need to use
11139 arg "newline-insert newline"
11144 to create multiple lines inside the
11151 \begin_inset space ~
11161 \begin_layout Right Address
11165 \begin_inset Newline newline
11168 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11169 \begin_inset Newline newline
11175 \begin_layout Address
11179 \begin_inset space ~
11185 \begin_layout Quotation
11188 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11192 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11193 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11194 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11195 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11196 as soon as possible.
11197 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11200 \begin_layout Quotation
11203 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11204 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11205 with your order, along with payment.
11208 \begin_layout Quotation
11211 We thank you again for your patience.
11214 \begin_layout Address
11218 \begin_inset Newline newline
11225 \begin_layout Quotation
11228 That ends that example!
11231 \begin_layout Standard
11234 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11235 gives you a lot of power with just
11237 We could have easily nested an
11258 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11261 \begin_layout Subsection
11263 \begin_inset Index idx
11266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11273 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11275 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11282 \begin_layout Standard
11285 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11287 For example you need two different enumerations:
11290 \begin_layout Enumerate
11297 \begin_layout Enumerate
11304 \begin_layout Enumerate
11310 \begin_layout Standard
11313 \begin_inset Separator plain
11319 \begin_layout Itemize
11327 \begin_layout Standard
11330 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11336 \begin_layout Enumerate
11342 \begin_layout Enumerate
11348 \begin_layout Enumerate
11354 \begin_layout Standard
11357 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11358 list item and use the menu
11360 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11361 Separated <Name> Above
11365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11366 Separated <Name> Below
11369 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11370 ) and before or behind it the
11372 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11375 \begin_layout Standard
11378 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11379 (red arrow in LyX).
11380 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11381 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11387 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11392 arg "paragraph-break"
11401 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11404 \begin_layout Section
11405 المسافات، ترقيم الصفحات والأسطر الفاصلة
11406 \begin_inset Index idx
11409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11418 \begin_layout Standard
11421 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11422 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11424 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11425 be broken at the end of a line.
11426 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11430 \begin_layout Subsection
11432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11434 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11439 \begin_inset Index idx
11442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11451 \begin_layout Standard
11454 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11455 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11456 ) not to break the line at
11458 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11461 \begin_layout Quote
11464 Further documentation is given in section
11465 \begin_inset Newline newline
11471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11473 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11480 \begin_layout Standard
11483 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11500 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11511 A protected space is set with
11513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11514 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11516 \begin_inset space ~
11526 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11534 \begin_layout Subsection
11536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11538 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11543 \begin_inset Index idx
11546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11558 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11560 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11561 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11565 The length units are listed in Appendix
11566 \begin_inset space ~
11570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11572 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11579 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11580 مسافة في وسط الكلمة
11581 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11583 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11588 \begin_inset Index idx
11591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11592 مسافات ! وسط الكلمة
11600 \begin_layout Standard
11603 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11604 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11605 at the ends of sentences.
11606 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11607 automatically takes care about this.
11608 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11609 followed by a period; see section
11612 \begin_inset space ~
11616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11618 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11625 To insert a normal space, select
11627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11628 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11630 \begin_inset space ~
11640 arg "space-insert normal"
11648 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11652 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11657 \begin_inset Index idx
11660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11669 \begin_layout Standard
11673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11680 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11689 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11690 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11691 inside abbreviations:
11694 \begin_layout Quote
11698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11702 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11705 \begin_layout Standard
11708 or between values and units.
11709 Compare for example this:
11710 \begin_inset Newline newline
11714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11718 \begin_inset Newline newline
11721 10 kg (normal space
11724 \begin_layout Standard
11727 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11730 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11732 \begin_inset space ~
11742 arg "space-insert thin"
11750 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11754 \begin_layout Standard
11757 You can also insert the following space types:
11760 \begin_layout Description
11764 \begin_inset space ~
11768 \begin_inset space ~
11771 space A line with a
11772 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11776 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11780 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11783 negative thin space between the arrows.
11786 \begin_layout Description
11790 \begin_inset space ~
11794 \begin_inset space ~
11797 space A line with a
11798 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11802 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11806 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11809 negative medium space between the arrows.
11812 \begin_layout Description
11816 \begin_inset space ~
11820 \begin_inset space ~
11823 space A line with a
11824 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11828 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11832 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11835 negative thick space between the arrows.
11838 \begin_layout Description
11842 \begin_inset space ~
11846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11850 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11854 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11858 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11862 \begin_inset space ~
11866 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11869 em) space between the arrows.
11872 \begin_layout Description
11876 \begin_inset space ~
11880 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11884 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11888 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11892 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11896 \begin_inset space ~
11900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11903 em) space between the arrows.
11906 \begin_layout Description
11910 \begin_inset space ~
11914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11918 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11922 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11926 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11930 \begin_inset space ~
11934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11937 em) space between the arrows.
11940 \begin_layout Description
11944 \begin_inset space ~
11948 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11952 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11957 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11964 cm space between the arrows.
11967 \begin_layout Standard
11973 \begin_inset space ~
11977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11979 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11985 lists the different space sizes.
11988 \begin_layout Standard
11991 \begin_inset Float table
11996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11999 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12006 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12010 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 \begin_inset Tabular
12023 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
12024 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12025 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
12026 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
12028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12128 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12160 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12284 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12337 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12354 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12355 feature for adding extra space
12356 in a uniform fashion.
12357 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
12358 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12359 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
12360 equally between themselves.
12363 \begin_layout Standard
12366 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12369 \begin_layout Quote
12373 This is on the left side
12374 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12377 This is on the right
12380 \begin_layout Quote
12385 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12389 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12395 \begin_layout Quote
12400 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12404 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12408 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12414 \begin_layout Standard
12417 That was an example in the
12423 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12431 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12434 is one in a standard paragraph.
12435 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12439 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12442 \begin_layout Standard
12445 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12448 \begin_inset space ~
12453 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12456 \begin_layout Standard
12460 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12464 \begin_inset space ~
12470 \begin_layout Standard
12474 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12478 \begin_inset space ~
12484 \begin_layout Standard
12488 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12492 \begin_inset space ~
12498 \begin_layout Standard
12502 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12506 \begin_inset space ~
12512 \begin_layout Standard
12516 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12520 \begin_inset space ~
12526 \begin_layout Standard
12530 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12540 \begin_layout Standard
12543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12552 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12556 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12558 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12559 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12563 option in the space dialog.
12571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12575 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12580 \begin_inset Index idx
12583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12592 \begin_layout Standard
12595 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12596 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12600 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12605 What is correct English?:
12606 \begin_inset Newline newline
12610 \begin_inset Newline newline
12614 \begin_inset space ~
12617 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12618 \begin_inset Newline newline
12622 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12635 \begin_inset Newline newline
12639 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12654 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12660 \begin_layout Standard
12664 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12669 \begin_inset space ~
12673 \begin_inset space ~
12677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12681 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12688 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12694 \begin_inset space ~
12698 \begin_inset space ~
12702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12705 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12714 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12715 That is why it is named
12716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12724 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12725 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12729 \begin_layout Subsection
12731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12733 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12738 \begin_inset Index idx
12741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12750 \begin_layout Standard
12753 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12756 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12764 There you find the following sizes:
12767 \begin_layout Standard
12781 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12782 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12787 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12792 \begin_inset space ~
12799 \begin_inset Index idx
12802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12810 for the paragraph separation.
12811 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12822 \begin_layout Standard
12830 \begin_inset Index idx
12833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12843 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12844 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12849 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12850 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12859 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12869 s are described in section
12870 \begin_inset space ~
12874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12876 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12885 If there are several
12889 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12890 You can therefore use
12894 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12897 \begin_layout Standard
12903 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12906 \begin_inset space ~
12910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12912 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12919 \begin_layout Standard
12922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12933 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12934 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12946 \begin_layout Subsection
12948 \begin_inset Index idx
12951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12960 \begin_layout Standard
12963 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12965 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12968 dialog (toolbar button
12973 arg "layout-paragraph"
12979 There are five possibilities:
12982 \begin_layout Itemize
12993 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13001 \begin_layout Itemize
13012 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13020 \begin_layout Itemize
13031 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13039 \begin_layout Itemize
13050 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13058 \begin_layout Itemize
13069 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13077 \begin_layout Standard
13080 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
13081 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
13082 the left and right margins.
13083 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
13086 \begin_layout Standard
13090 This paragraph is right aligned,
13093 \begin_layout Standard
13097 this one is centered,
13100 \begin_layout Standard
13104 this one is left aligned.
13107 \begin_layout Subsection
13109 \begin_inset Index idx
13112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13121 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13128 \begin_layout Standard
13131 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13132 does the page breaks in your document, you can
13133 force a page break where you want one.
13134 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13135 is good at page breaking.
13136 Only if you use a lot of
13140 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
13141 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13144 \begin_layout Standard
13147 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
13148 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13152 have to change the page breaking.
13155 \begin_layout Standard
13158 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
13160 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13162 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13163 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13165 \begin_inset space ~
13171 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
13173 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13174 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13176 \begin_inset space ~
13181 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
13183 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
13184 on which only the last few lines are absent.
13187 \begin_layout Standard
13190 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
13191 at the top of a page.
13192 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
13194 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
13195 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
13196 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13202 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13208 to learn more about
13215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13219 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13224 \begin_inset Index idx
13227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13236 \begin_layout Standard
13239 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
13240 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13241 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
13242 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
13243 it, if necessary by adding pages.
13246 \begin_layout Standard
13249 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13252 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13254 \begin_inset space ~
13260 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
13262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13263 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13269 \begin_inset space ~
13274 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
13275 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
13278 \begin_layout Subsection
13280 \begin_inset Index idx
13283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13292 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13299 \begin_layout Standard
13302 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13304 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13307 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13309 \begin_inset space ~
13313 \begin_inset space ~
13323 arg "newline-insert newline"
13329 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13332 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13334 \begin_inset space ~
13338 \begin_inset space ~
13348 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13353 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13355 This is useful to avoid
13356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13363 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13366 \begin_layout Standard
13369 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13370 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13372 very good at line breaking.
13373 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13374 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13377 \begin_inset space ~
13381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13383 reference "sec:Quote"
13388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13390 reference "sec:Verse"
13399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13401 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13410 \begin_layout Subsection
13412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13414 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13419 \begin_inset Index idx
13422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13431 \begin_layout Standard
13435 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13446 \begin_layout Standard
13452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13453 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13455 \begin_inset space ~
13460 you can insert horizontal lines.
13461 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13462 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13463 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13466 \begin_layout Standard
13470 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13481 \begin_layout Section
13485 \begin_layout Standard
13488 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13489 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13490 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13500 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13506 for information on how this is done.
13509 \begin_layout Standard
13512 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13517 dialog via the menu
13519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13520 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13526 \begin_layout Standard
13529 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13538 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13539 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13541 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13549 \begin_layout Section
13551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13553 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13560 \begin_layout Subsection
13562 \begin_inset Index idx
13565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13574 \begin_layout Standard
13577 There are two types of fonts:
13580 \begin_layout Description
13582 \begin_inset space ~
13586 \begin_inset Index idx
13589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13597 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13602 characters) in the font.
13603 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13604 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13605 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13606 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13607 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13608 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13609 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13610 \begin_inset Newline newline
13613 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13614 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13615 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13616 sizes than at small ones.
13617 \begin_inset Newline newline
13631 \begin_inset space ~
13639 \begin_layout Description
13641 \begin_inset space ~
13645 \begin_inset Index idx
13648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13656 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13657 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13658 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13659 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13660 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13661 image manipulation program.
13662 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13663 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13664 \begin_inset space ~
13667 pixels high up to 34
13668 \begin_inset space ~
13671 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13672 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13673 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13675 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13676 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13677 \begin_inset Newline newline
13680 Bitmap fonts are named
13683 \begin_inset space ~
13688 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13691 \begin_layout Standard
13694 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13695 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13696 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13697 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13698 use scalable fonts.
13701 \begin_layout Standard
13704 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13707 \begin_layout Standard
13710 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13711 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13712 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13713 font to emphasize text, you use an
13714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13722 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13724 In \SpecialChar LyX
13725 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13729 \begin_layout Subsection
13730 دعم الخطوط في لتيكس \SpecialChar LaTeX
13732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13734 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13741 \begin_layout Standard
13744 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13745 used its own fonts.
13746 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13747 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13750 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13751 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13752 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13753 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13754 to a word processor.
13755 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13756 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13757 files are very portable across
13758 different machines.
13759 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13760 has increased a lot
13761 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13764 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13766 \begin_inset space ~
13770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13772 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13777 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13778 code in the document
13779 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13782 \begin_layout Standard
13785 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13786 engines that are also able directly
13787 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13789 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13791 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13793 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13794 that is installed on your system.
13795 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13801 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13810 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13811 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13819 \begin_layout Subsection
13821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13823 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13828 \begin_inset Index idx
13831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13838 \begin_inset Index idx
13841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13850 \begin_layout Standard
13853 You can set the document fonts in the
13855 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13860 \begin_inset Index idx
13863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13876 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13877 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13880 \begin_inset space ~
13889 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13891 \begin_inset space ~
13894 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13897 \begin_layout Standard
13904 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13905 This requires that you use
13917 as the output format, i.
13918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13922 \begin_inset space \space{}
13925 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13926 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13927 installed (see section
13930 \begin_inset space ~
13934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13936 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13943 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13945 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13946 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13948 \begin_inset space ~
13951 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13952 cannot determine the family.
13953 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13954 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13957 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13960 \begin_layout Standard
13963 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13964 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13969 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13975 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13976 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
13979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13985 \begin_inset space ~
13991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14016 European Computer Modern
14019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14027 However, some classes set different default fonts.
14030 \begin_layout Standard
14037 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
14038 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14045 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14048 \begin_inset space ~
14053 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
14059 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
14060 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
14063 \begin_layout Itemize
14069 \begin_inset space ~
14074 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14087 \begin_inset space ~
14092 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14093 community in order to replace
14097 as the default font.
14098 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14099 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
14102 \begin_inset space ~
14115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14118 One difference is improved kerning.
14126 \begin_layout Itemize
14129 If you do not like the look of
14137 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
14138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14142 \begin_inset space ~
14148 \begin_inset space ~
14158 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14159 \begin_inset space ~
14162 serif and typewriter fonts,
14166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14169 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14176 \begin_inset space ~
14185 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
14186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14190 \begin_inset space \space{}
14198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14202 \begin_inset space \space{}
14208 \begin_inset space ~
14216 \begin_inset space ~
14226 but you can also select your own.
14227 \begin_inset Newline newline
14230 The differences between roman,
14233 \begin_inset space ~
14242 fonts are explained in section
14245 \begin_inset space ~
14249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14251 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14258 \begin_inset Newline newline
14264 \begin_inset space ~
14269 was originally designed for newspapers.
14270 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14271 into the small newspaper columns.
14275 \begin_inset space ~
14280 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14283 \begin_layout Standard
14286 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14299 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14304 depends on the class you are using.
14305 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14308 \begin_layout Standard
14311 Note that the font size is the
14316 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14317 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14318 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14319 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14322 \begin_inset space ~
14328 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14331 \begin_inset space ~
14335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14337 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14344 \begin_layout Standard
14350 \begin_inset space ~
14355 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14357 \begin_inset space ~
14360 serif or typewriter.
14365 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14375 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14378 \begin_layout Standard
14385 LaTeX font encoding
14387 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14388 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14396 \begin_inset Index idx
14399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14400 حزمة لتيك ! fontenc
14410 \begin_inset space ~
14414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14416 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14423 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14424 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14431 \begin_layout Standard
14434 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14436 Use Old Style Figures
14440 Use True Small Caps
14443 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14446 Use Old Style Figures
14448 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14450 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14458 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14462 Use True Small Caps
14464 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14465 of scaled capitals.
14466 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14467 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14470 \begin_layout Standard
14477 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14478 a font to display the script characters.
14482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14485 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14493 \begin_inset Index idx
14496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14504 So this has no effect for the document language
14520 \begin_layout Standard
14525 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14527 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14528 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14535 \begin_inset Index idx
14538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14539 حزمة لتيك ! microtype
14547 \begin_layout Standard
14552 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14554 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14561 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14562 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14568 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14569 \begin_inset space ~
14573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14575 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14585 \begin_layout Standard
14588 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14592 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14601 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14606 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14607 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14609 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14611 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14614 dialog, see section
14615 \begin_inset space ~
14619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14621 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14633 \begin_layout Subsection
14637 \begin_layout Standard
14640 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14641 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14643 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14644 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14645 choose a math font in the dialog
14647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14652 \begin_inset Index idx
14655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14664 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14665 automatically selects a math font.
14666 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14667 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14676 \begin_inset space ~
14682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14687 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14688 document font is available.
14691 \begin_layout Standard
14694 Note that the math font will not be used for
14698 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14708 or by the insertion of the command
14715 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14716 \begin_inset space ~
14720 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14721 while the math characters do not.
14723 \begin_inset space ~
14726 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14729 \begin_inset space ~
14737 \begin_inset space ~
14742 in the document font settings.
14745 \begin_layout Standard
14748 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14749 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14750 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14751 font (in most cases
14752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14758 \begin_inset space ~
14764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14767 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14768 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14776 \begin_inset space ~
14782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14788 \begin_layout Subsection
14789 استخدام انساق محارف مختلفة
14790 \begin_inset Index idx
14793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14800 \begin_inset Index idx
14803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14812 \begin_layout Standard
14815 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14816 automatically changes the character style for certain
14817 paragraph environments.
14819 supports two character styles,
14828 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
14832 \begin_layout Standard
14839 style, do one of the following:
14842 \begin_layout Itemize
14845 click on the toolbar button
14856 \begin_layout Itemize
14859 use the key binding
14870 \begin_layout Standard
14873 These commands are all toggles.
14878 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14881 \begin_layout Standard
14884 One typically uses the
14888 style for proper names.
14890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14897 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14905 \begin_layout Standard
14908 A more widely used character style is the
14913 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14920 \begin_layout Itemize
14923 clicking on the toolbar button
14934 \begin_layout Itemize
14937 using the keybindings
14948 \begin_layout Standard
14955 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14957 use a different font.
14960 \begin_layout Standard
14963 We've been using the
14967 style all over the place in this document.
14968 Here's one more example:
14971 \begin_layout Quotation
14975 Do not overuse character styles!
14978 \begin_layout Standard
14981 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14982 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14983 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14984 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
14988 \begin_layout Standard
14991 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
15003 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15008 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15016 arg "dialog-show character"
15024 \begin_layout Subsection
15025 الضبط الدقيق من نافذة أسلوب النص
15026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15028 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15033 \begin_inset Index idx
15036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15045 \begin_layout Standard
15048 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
15050 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
15051 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15052 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15053 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15054 from ordinary dialog.
15057 \begin_layout Standard
15060 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
15061 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
15062 \begin_inset Newline newline
15065 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15066 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15069 \begin_layout Standard
15072 To use custom character styles, open the
15074 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15076 \begin_inset space ~
15079 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15082 dialog or press the toolbar button
15087 arg "dialog-show character"
15093 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15094 font property that you can choose.
15095 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15098 \begin_inset space ~
15103 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15108 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15109 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15110 environments all at once.
15113 \begin_layout Standard
15116 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
15119 \begin_inset space ~
15131 \begin_layout Labeling
15132 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15147 The possible options are:
15151 \begin_layout Labeling
15152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15158 This is the Roman font family.
15159 Normally a serif font.
15160 It's also the default family.
15174 \begin_layout Labeling
15175 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15187 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15203 \begin_layout Labeling
15204 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15212 This is the Typewriter font family.
15220 arg "font-typewriter"
15230 \begin_layout Labeling
15231 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15237 This corresponds to the print weight.
15242 \begin_layout Labeling
15243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15249 This is the Medium font series.
15250 It's also the default series.
15253 \begin_layout Labeling
15254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15262 This is the Bold font series.
15279 \begin_layout Labeling
15280 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15286 As the name implies.
15291 \begin_layout Labeling
15292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15298 This is the Upright font shape.
15299 It's also the default shape.
15302 \begin_layout Labeling
15303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15318 s the Italic font shape
15324 \begin_layout Labeling
15325 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15333 This is the Slanted font shape
15335 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15336 , this is different from italic).
15339 \begin_layout Labeling
15340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15352 This is the Small caps font shape
15359 \begin_layout Labeling
15360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15366 Alters the text color.
15367 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
15371 \begin_inset space ~
15376 , which means that the document default color set in
15378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15379 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15385 \begin_inset space ~
15390 is used, you can choose between
15469 \begin_inset Index idx
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15481 \begin_layout Labeling
15482 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15488 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15489 the language of the document.
15490 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
15491 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15493 \begin_inset Newline newline
15496 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15498 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15499 When using the spell checking (see section
15502 \begin_inset space ~
15506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15508 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15514 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15517 \begin_layout Labeling
15518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15524 Alters the size of the font.
15525 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
15526 proportional to the document font size.
15527 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15528 the details, but a general description of what
15534 \begin_layout Labeling
15535 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15559 arg "font-size tiny"
15567 \begin_layout Labeling
15568 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15592 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15600 \begin_layout Labeling
15601 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15625 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15633 \begin_layout Labeling
15634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15658 arg "font-size small"
15666 \begin_layout Labeling
15667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15682 It's also the default size.
15688 arg "font-size normal"
15696 \begin_layout Labeling
15697 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15721 arg "font-size large"
15729 \begin_layout Labeling
15730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15754 arg "font-size larger"
15762 \begin_layout Labeling
15763 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15787 arg "font-size largest"
15795 \begin_layout Labeling
15796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15820 arg "font-size huge"
15828 \begin_layout Labeling
15829 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15853 arg "font-size giant"
15861 \begin_layout Labeling
15862 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15868 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15890 arg "font-size increase"
15898 \begin_layout Labeling
15899 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15905 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15927 arg "font-size decrease"
15936 \begin_layout Standard
15943 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15944 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15946 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15947 — use those instead.
15948 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15951 \begin_layout Labeling
15952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15958 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
15963 \begin_layout Labeling
15964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15972 This is text with emphasize on
15975 This might seem like the same as
15979 , but it is actually a bit different.
15985 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15987 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15990 \begin_layout Labeling
15991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15999 This is text with Underbar on.
16007 arg "font-underline"
16015 \begin_inset Newline newline
16020 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16021 when you could not change fonts.
16022 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16023 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16024 because some people
16028 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16031 \begin_layout Labeling
16032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16037 \begin_inset space ~
16044 This is text with Double underbar on.
16052 arg "font-underunderline"
16058 \begin_inset Newline newline
16061 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16062 about double underbar.
16065 \begin_layout Labeling
16066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16071 \begin_inset space ~
16078 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
16086 arg "font-underwave"
16092 \begin_inset Newline newline
16095 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16096 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16099 \begin_layout Labeling
16100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16105 \begin_inset space ~
16112 This is text with Strikeout on.
16120 arg "font-strikeout"
16126 \begin_inset Newline newline
16129 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16130 changed in the meantime.
16133 \begin_layout Labeling
16134 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16139 \begin_inset space ~
16146 This is text with Cross out on.
16149 \begin_inset Newline newline
16152 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16155 \begin_layout Labeling
16156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16164 This is text with Noun on.
16171 , this is a logical attribute.
16172 Normally it's equivalent to
16175 \begin_inset space ~
16184 \begin_layout Standard
16187 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
16188 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
16190 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16192 \begin_inset space ~
16195 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16203 arg "dialog-show character"
16208 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
16209 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
16214 arg "textstyle-apply"
16220 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
16224 \begin_layout Standard
16227 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
16238 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
16239 (suppose you just set the shape to
16240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16258 \begin_inset space ~
16270 \begin_layout Standard
16273 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16281 \begin_inset space ~
16293 \begin_layout Itemize
16300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16307 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16325 \begin_inset Newline newline
16329 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16345 \begin_inset Note Note
16348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16351 For more on phantoms see section
16352 \begin_inset space ~
16356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16358 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16368 \begin_inset Newline newline
16374 \begin_layout Itemize
16380 fonts use characters with serifs.
16381 These are the small
16382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16389 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16390 The following example shows the difference:
16391 \begin_inset Newline newline
16395 \begin_inset Newline newline
16400 text without serifs
16403 \begin_inset Newline newline
16406 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16407 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16414 \begin_layout Itemize
16420 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16421 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16422 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16425 \begin_layout Standard
16428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16435 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16436 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16439 \begin_inset space ~
16444 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16445 the property to be removed.
16446 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16447 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16448 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16466 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16467 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16479 \begin_inset space ~
16484 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 If you, for example, set
16496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16514 \begin_inset space ~
16519 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16528 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16531 \begin_layout Standard
16534 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
16535 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16538 \begin_layout Section
16542 \begin_layout Subsection
16546 \begin_layout Standard
16549 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16550 using \SpecialChar LyX
16551 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16552 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16553 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16554 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16556 Additional Features
16561 \begin_layout Standard
16565 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16568 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16569 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16570 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16573 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16574 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16575 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16576 to turn your writing into printable output.
16577 This happens in two stages:
16580 \begin_layout Enumerate
16583 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16584 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16586 a file with the extension,
16587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16601 \begin_layout Enumerate
16604 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16605 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16606 to use the commands in the
16610 file to produce printable output.
16613 \begin_layout Subsection
16615 \begin_inset Index idx
16618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16627 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16636 \begin_inset Index idx
16639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16648 \begin_layout Standard
16651 This file type has the extension
16652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16664 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16668 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16675 \begin_layout Standard
16678 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16680 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16681 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16683 \begin_inset space ~
16689 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16690 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16691 bibliography (section
16694 \begin_inset space ~
16698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16700 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16707 If your document includes such material, use
16709 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16710 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16712 \begin_inset space ~
16716 \begin_inset space ~
16720 \begin_inset space ~
16728 \begin_inset space ~
16732 \begin_inset space ~
16738 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16739 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16745 \begin_inset Index idx
16748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16757 \begin_layout Standard
16760 This file type has the extension
16761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16772 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16775 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16776 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16777 -Errors or to process it manually
16778 with console commands.
16779 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16780 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16781 's temporary directory whenever you
16782 view or export your document.
16785 \begin_layout Standard
16788 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16789 -file using the menu
16791 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16792 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16796 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16797 export variants are explained in section
16800 \begin_inset space ~
16804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16806 reference "subsec:Export"
16813 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16815 \begin_inset Index idx
16818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16827 \begin_layout Standard
16830 This file type has the extension
16831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16851 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16852 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16853 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16857 \begin_layout Standard
16860 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16861 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16862 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16863 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16864 when you view the DVI.
16865 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16868 \begin_layout Standard
16871 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16873 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16874 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16879 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16880 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16882 \begin_inset space ~
16888 The latter option uses the program
16890 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16896 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16899 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16900 font access (see section
16901 \begin_inset space ~
16905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16907 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16912 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16913 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16920 \begin_inset Index idx
16923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16924 هيئة الملف ! بوست سكربت
16932 \begin_layout Standard
16935 This file type has the extension
16936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16948 PostScript was developed by the company
16952 as a printer language.
16953 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16955 PostScript can be seen as a
16956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16959 programming language
16960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16963 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16970 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16978 \begin_inset Index idx
16981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16982 حزمة لتيك ! pstricks
16992 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16995 \begin_layout Standard
16998 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17002 Encapsulated PostScript
17003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17006 (EPS, file extension
17007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17019 As \SpecialChar LyX
17020 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17021 convert them in the background to EPS.
17022 If, for example, you have 50
17023 \begin_inset space ~
17026 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17028 \begin_inset space ~
17031 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17032 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17034 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17035 EPS to avoid this problem.
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17041 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17043 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17044 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17052 \begin_inset Index idx
17055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17062 \begin_inset Index idx
17065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17076 \begin_layout Standard
17079 This file type has the extension
17080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17096 Portable Document Format
17097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17104 was derived from PostScript.
17105 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17114 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17115 looks exactly the same.
17118 \begin_layout Standard
17121 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17125 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17129 (JPG, file extension
17130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17157 Portable Network Graphics
17158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17161 (PNG, file extension
17162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17174 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17175 converts them in the
17176 background to one of these formats.
17177 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17178 will slow down your workflow.
17179 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17182 \begin_layout Standard
17185 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17187 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17193 \begin_layout Description
17197 \begin_inset space ~
17200 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17204 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17207 \begin_layout Description
17211 \begin_inset space ~
17218 ) This uses the program
17220 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17223 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17226 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17229 is a new engine, derived from
17233 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17234 access (see section
17235 \begin_inset space ~
17239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17241 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17246 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17247 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17252 \begin_layout Description
17256 \begin_inset space ~
17263 ) This uses the program
17268 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17274 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17275 font access (see section
17276 \begin_inset space ~
17280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17282 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17287 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17288 vertically written Japanese.
17291 \begin_layout Description
17295 \begin_inset space ~
17298 (cropped) This is the same as
17301 \begin_inset space ~
17306 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17307 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17308 to generate good-looking
17309 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17312 \begin_layout Description
17316 \begin_inset space ~
17319 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17323 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17327 \begin_layout Description
17331 \begin_inset space ~
17334 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17338 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17339 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17343 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17344 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17347 \begin_layout Standard
17353 \begin_inset space ~
17362 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17363 works without problems.
17364 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17365 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17369 \begin_inset space ~
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17382 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17392 \begin_inset Index idx
17395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17402 \begin_inset Index idx
17405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17416 \begin_layout Standard
17419 This file type has the extension
17420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17432 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17433 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17434 When \SpecialChar LyX
17435 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17436 suitable for the purpose.
17437 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17440 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17443 between different formats, which are described in section
17445 Math Output in XHTML
17450 \begin_inset space ~
17458 \begin_layout Standard
17461 XHTML output remains
17462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17469 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17470 features are supported yet.
17474 and the World Wide Web
17478 Additional Features
17480 manual, for more information.
17483 \begin_layout Standard
17486 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17488 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17489 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17495 \begin_layout Subsection
17497 \begin_inset Index idx
17500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17509 \begin_layout Standard
17512 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17513 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17522 or use the toolbar button
17533 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17534 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17535 \begin_inset space ~
17539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17541 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17545 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17547 \begin_inset space ~
17551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17553 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17558 Further output formats can be selected via
17560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17561 View (Other Formats)
17563 or the toolbar button
17574 \begin_layout Standard
17577 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17578 viewer window using the menu
17580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17586 Update (Other Formats)
17591 \begin_layout Standard
17594 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17597 To have a real output, export your document.
17600 \begin_layout Section
17601 كلمات قليلة عن الطباعة
17602 \begin_inset Index idx
17605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17614 \begin_layout Subsection
17615 الواصلات, وعلامتا الشرطة والناقص
17616 \begin_inset Index idx
17619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17626 \begin_inset Index idx
17629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17638 \begin_layout Standard
17641 In \SpecialChar LyX
17643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17654 symbol comes in four variants: the
17671 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17677 \begin_layout Standard
17680 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17690 height_special "totalheight"
17695 backgroundcolor "none"
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17701 \begin_inset Tabular
17702 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17703 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17704 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17705 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17706 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17707 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17742 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17743 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17788 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17789 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17817 system key combination or
17818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17831 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17860 system key combination or
17861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17875 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17892 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17933 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17939 \begin_layout Standard
17942 Dashes can also be inserted with
17944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17946 \begin_inset space ~
17949 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17957 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17958 and 2014 for the en dash).
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17964 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17965 mode and has a length of its own.
17966 Here are some examples:
17969 \begin_layout Enumerate
17972 line- and page-breaks
17973 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17983 \begin_layout Enumerate
17987 \begin_inset space ~
17991 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18001 \begin_layout Enumerate
18004 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18005 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18015 \begin_layout Enumerate
18018 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18022 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18032 \begin_layout Standard
18036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18038 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18039 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18047 \begin_layout Subsection
18049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18051 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18058 \begin_layout Standard
18061 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18062 case and locale, e.
18063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18069 \begin_layout Itemize
18072 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18073 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18076 \begin_layout Itemize
18079 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18083 \begin_layout Itemize
18086 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18087 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18090 \begin_layout Standard
18093 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18094 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18105 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
18108 \begin_layout Enumerate
18111 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18112 \begin_inset space ~
18115 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18117 The Elements of Typographic Style
18120 \begin_inset space ~
18123 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18126 \begin_layout Enumerate
18129 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18138 Prevent Hyphenation
18143 \begin_inset space ~
18159 in \SpecialChar TeX
18165 \begin_layout Itemize
18169 \begin_inset space ~
18173 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18183 height_special "totalheight"
18188 backgroundcolor "none"
18191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18202 \begin_layout Itemize
18206 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18216 height_special "totalheight"
18221 backgroundcolor "none"
18224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18228 \begin_inset space ~
18236 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18237 \begin_inset space ~
18240 – sont très utiles.
18243 \begin_layout Itemize
18250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18259 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18263 \begin_layout Standard
18266 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18267 \begin_inset space ~
18270 – in contrast to an overfull line
18271 \begin_inset space ~
18274 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18278 \begin_layout Standard
18281 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18285 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18286 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18287 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18292 \begin_layout Enumerate
18295 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18296 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18297 or \SpecialChar TeX
18303 \begin_layout Itemize
18307 \begin_inset space ~
18310 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18311 \begin_inset space ~
18314 – sont très utiles.
18318 \begin_layout Enumerate
18321 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18322 \begin_inset Newline newline
18327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18328 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18329 Optional line break
18335 \begin_layout Itemize
18338 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18339 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18340 should be followed by
18341 a line break opportunity.
18344 \begin_layout Standard
18347 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18348 \begin_inset space ~
18352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18354 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18365 \begin_layout Enumerate
18368 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18369 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18370 or en dashes (see section
18371 \begin_inset space ~
18375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18377 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18390 Changes and backwards compatibility
18393 \begin_layout Standard
18396 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18398 \begin_inset space ~
18401 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18402 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18411 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18412 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18420 \begin_layout Standard
18423 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18425 \begin_inset space ~
18428 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18430 prevents ligation to dashes.
18432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18439 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18444 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18445 after the input (unless the current text font is
18453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 The behavior was changed since
18457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18472 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18473 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18474 as non-breakable dashes.
18475 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18484 \begin_layout Standard
18489 \begin_inset space ~
18497 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18499 \begin_inset space ~
18502 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18506 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18507 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18508 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18510 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18514 If you used both literal and
18515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18522 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18524 \begin_inset space ~
18527 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18528 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18531 \begin_layout Subsection
18533 \begin_inset Index idx
18536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18545 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18552 \begin_layout Standard
18555 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18556 but automatically in the output.
18557 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18565 \begin_inset Index idx
18568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18576 following the rules of the document language.
18578 does not hyphenate text in the
18582 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18585 \begin_layout Standard
18589 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18593 font and with unusual constructs, like
18594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18602 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18603 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18604 This is done with the menu
18606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18607 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18609 \begin_inset space ~
18615 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18617 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18621 \begin_layout Standard
18624 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18625 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18636 would then see the hyphen
18637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18644 as a line break possibility.
18645 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18646 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18649 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18650 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18653 ) or put it into a makebox
18656 \begin_layout Standard
18659 as described in section
18661 Prevent Hyphenation
18666 \begin_inset space ~
18674 \begin_layout Subsection
18676 \begin_inset Index idx
18679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18689 الاختصارات ونهايات الجمل
18690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18692 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18699 \begin_layout Standard
18702 When \SpecialChar LyX
18703 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18704 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18706 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18712 appropriate amount of space.
18713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18716 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18718 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18719 gets after another word.
18722 \begin_layout Standard
18725 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18726 not work in all cases.
18728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18739 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18740 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18743 \begin_layout Standard
18746 Here are some examples of
18750 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18753 \begin_layout Itemize
18760 \begin_layout Itemize
18767 \begin_layout Standard
18770 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18773 \begin_layout Itemize
18777 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18781 this is too much space!
18784 \begin_layout Itemize
18791 \begin_layout Standard
18794 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18797 \begin_layout Standard
18800 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18803 \begin_layout Enumerate
18809 \begin_inset space ~
18814 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18815 \begin_inset space ~
18819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18821 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18828 \begin_inset Index idx
18831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 مسافات ! وسط الكلمة
18840 \begin_layout Enumerate
18846 \begin_inset space ~
18851 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18852 \begin_inset space ~
18856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18858 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18865 \begin_inset Index idx
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18877 \begin_layout Enumerate
18883 \begin_inset space ~
18887 \begin_inset space ~
18891 \begin_inset space ~
18898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18900 \begin_inset space ~
18905 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18906 This function is also bound to
18911 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18919 \begin_layout Standard
18922 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18925 \begin_layout Itemize
18929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18933 \begin_inset space \space{}
18936 this is too much space!
18939 \begin_layout Itemize
18942 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18946 \begin_layout Standard
18949 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18950 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18952 will take care of this.
18955 \begin_layout Standard
18958 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18962 \begin_inset space ~
18968 feature described in the section
18970 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18975 Additional Features
18980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18982 \begin_inset Index idx
18985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18986 طباعة ! علامات الاقتباس
18992 \begin_inset Index idx
18995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18996 علامات الاقتباس | أنظر
19000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19026 \begin_layout Standard
19030 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19031 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19032 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19042 The keyboard character,
19046 , generates this automatically.
19049 \begin_layout Standard
19052 You can specify what character the
19056 key produces by using the submenu
19062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19067 \begin_inset Index idx
19070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19078 dialog and switching the
19082 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19083 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19085 \begin_inset space ~
19091 \begin_layout Labeling
19092 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19105 \begin_inset space ~
19109 \begin_inset space ~
19113 \begin_inset Quotes els
19117 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19131 \begin_inset Quotes els
19135 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19138 quotation marks (as common, e.
19139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19145 \begin_layout Labeling
19146 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19150 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19154 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19158 \begin_inset space ~
19162 \begin_inset space ~
19166 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19170 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19176 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19180 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19184 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19188 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19191 quotation marks (as common, e.
19192 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19198 \begin_layout Labeling
19199 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19203 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19207 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19211 \begin_inset space ~
19215 \begin_inset space ~
19219 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19223 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19229 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19233 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19237 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19241 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19244 quotation marks (as common, e.
19245 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19251 \begin_layout Labeling
19252 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19256 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19260 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19264 \begin_inset space ~
19268 \begin_inset space ~
19272 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19276 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19282 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19286 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19290 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19294 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19297 quotation marks (as common, e.
19298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19304 \begin_layout Labeling
19305 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19309 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19313 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19317 \begin_inset space ~
19321 \begin_inset space ~
19325 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19329 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19335 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19339 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19343 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19347 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19350 quotation marks (as common, e.
19351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19354 g., in Switzerland)
19357 \begin_layout Labeling
19358 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19362 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19366 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19370 \begin_inset space ~
19374 \begin_inset space ~
19378 \begin_inset Quotes als
19382 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19388 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19392 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19396 \begin_inset Quotes als
19400 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19403 quotation marks (as common, e.
19404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19410 \begin_layout Labeling
19411 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19415 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19419 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19423 \begin_inset space ~
19427 \begin_inset space ~
19431 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19435 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19441 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19445 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19449 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19453 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19456 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19459 \begin_layout Labeling
19460 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19464 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19468 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19472 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19484 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19490 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19494 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19498 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19502 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19505 quotation marks (as common, e.
19506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19509 g., in Great Britain)
19512 \begin_layout Labeling
19513 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19517 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19521 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19525 \begin_inset space ~
19529 \begin_inset space ~
19533 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19537 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19543 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19547 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19551 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19555 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19558 quotation marks (as common, e.
19559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19565 \begin_layout Labeling
19566 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19570 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19574 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19578 \begin_inset space ~
19582 \begin_inset space ~
19586 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19590 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19596 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19600 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19604 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19608 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19611 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19618 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19619 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19620 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19621 the inner marks differ).
19629 \begin_layout Labeling
19630 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19634 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19638 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19642 \begin_inset space ~
19646 \begin_inset space ~
19650 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19654 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19660 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19664 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19668 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19672 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19675 quotation marks (as common, e.
19676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19682 \begin_layout Labeling
19683 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19687 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19691 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19695 \begin_inset space ~
19699 \begin_inset space ~
19703 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19707 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19713 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19717 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19721 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19725 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19728 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19731 \begin_layout Standard
19734 Inner quotation marks
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19741 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19742 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19743 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19751 does not necessarily mean
19752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19760 This is why we call them
19761 \begin_inset Quotes els
19765 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19781 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19783 \begin_inset Quotes els
19787 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19790 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19795 arg "quote-insert inner"
19802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19808 \begin_layout Standard
19811 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19812 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19813 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19814 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19815 If you check the setting
19817 Use dynamic quotation marks
19821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19822 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19825 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19826 they appear in a special color).
19827 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19828 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19833 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19836 \begin_layout Standard
19839 Individual quotation marks (i.
19840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19843 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19844 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19848 \begin_layout Subsection
19850 \begin_inset Index idx
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 \begin_inset Index idx
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19892 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19894 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19901 \begin_layout Standard
19904 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19905 print them as single characters.
19906 These groups are known as
19911 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19912 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19914 Here are the standard ligatures:
19917 \begin_layout Itemize
19923 \begin_layout Itemize
19929 \begin_layout Itemize
19935 \begin_layout Itemize
19941 \begin_layout Itemize
19947 \begin_layout Standard
19950 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19953 \begin_layout Standard
19956 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19957 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19965 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19981 To break a ligature, use
19983 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19984 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19986 \begin_inset space ~
19993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20004 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20021 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20029 \begin_layout Subsection
20030 رمزي \SpecialChar LyX
20031 و \SpecialChar LaTeX
20033 \begin_inset Index idx
20036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 \begin_layout Standard
20050 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20051 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20055 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20058 \begin_layout Description
20062 The name of the game.
20065 \begin_layout Description
20069 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20073 \begin_layout Description
20077 The \SpecialChar TeX
20078 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20082 \begin_layout Description
20085 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20086 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20090 \begin_layout Standard
20093 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20099 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20107 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20108 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20109 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20110 converges to the number
20111 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20114 : The actual version is
20115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20123 , the previous one was
20124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20135 \begin_layout Subsection
20137 \begin_inset Index idx
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 \begin_layout Standard
20152 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20153 space between two words.
20154 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20164 for units use the menu
20166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20167 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20169 \begin_inset space ~
20179 arg "space-insert thin"
20187 \begin_layout Standard
20190 Here is an example to show the differences:
20193 \begin_layout Standard
20196 \begin_inset Tabular
20197 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20198 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20199 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20200 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 \begin_inset space ~
20213 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 space between number and unit
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20245 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 half space between number and unit
20272 \begin_layout Subsection
20274 \begin_inset Index idx
20277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 طباعة ! نافذة وأيتام
20286 \begin_layout Standard
20289 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20291 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20292 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20293 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20294 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20295 These bits of text became known as
20306 \begin_layout Standard
20309 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20310 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20311 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20312 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20313 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20314 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20315 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20316 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20317 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20318 \begin_inset Newline newline
20326 \begin_inset Newline newline
20334 \begin_inset Newline newline
20337 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20338 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20339 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20341 \begin_inset space ~
20345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20347 key "latexcompanion"
20353 \begin_inset space ~
20357 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20364 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20365 's page break mechanism.
20368 \begin_layout Chapter
20369 الملاحظات، الصور، الجداول والتعويم
20370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20372 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20379 \begin_layout Standard
20382 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20385 \begin_inset space ~
20391 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20394 \begin_layout Section
20396 \begin_inset Index idx
20399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20415 \begin_layout Standard
20419 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20422 \begin_layout Description
20427 \begin_inset space ~
20430 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20431 \begin_inset Newline newline
20435 \begin_inset Note Note
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20441 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20449 \begin_layout Description
20452 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20453 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20454 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20457 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20458 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20460 \begin_inset space ~
20466 \begin_inset Newline newline
20470 \begin_inset Note Comment
20473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20476 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20485 \begin_layout Description
20489 \begin_inset space ~
20492 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20493 set in the document settings under
20495 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20497 \begin_inset space ~
20503 \begin_inset Newline newline
20507 \begin_inset Newline newline
20511 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20524 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20525 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20530 of a comment that appears in the output.
20536 \begin_inset Newline newline
20540 \begin_inset Newline newline
20543 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20546 \begin_layout Standard
20549 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20565 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20568 \begin_layout Section
20570 \begin_inset Index idx
20573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20582 name "sec:Footnotes"
20589 \begin_layout Standard
20593 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20599 or the toolbar button
20604 arg "footnote-insert"
20618 \begin_inset Graphics
20619 filename ../clipart/footnote.png
20628 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20629 's representation of your footnote.
20639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20658 label, the box will
20662 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20663 Clicking on the box label again will close
20676 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20677 and click on the footnote
20692 \begin_layout Standard
20695 Here is an example footnote:
20703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20706 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20714 \begin_layout Standard
20717 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20718 position where the footnote box is placed.
20719 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20720 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20721 according to the document class.
20723 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20724 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20730 ey are described in the
20733 \begin_inset space ~
20741 \begin_layout Section
20743 \begin_inset Index idx
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20753 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20755 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20762 \begin_layout Standard
20765 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20767 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20771 \begin_inset space ~
20776 or the toolbar button
20781 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20809 appearing within your text.
20810 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20811 's representation of your margin
20820 \begin_layout Standard
20823 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20827 \begin_inset Marginal
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20834 This is a marginal note.
20842 \begin_layout Standard
20845 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20846 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20847 pages, right on odd pages.
20850 \begin_layout Standard
20853 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20856 \begin_inset space ~
20864 \begin_inset space ~
20872 \begin_layout Section
20873 الصور والرسوم التوضيحية
20874 \begin_inset Index idx
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 \begin_inset Index idx
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20896 name "sec:Graphics"
20903 \begin_layout Standard
20906 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20907 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20912 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20923 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20926 \begin_layout Standard
20929 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20934 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20935 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20937 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20940 \begin_inset space ~
20944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20946 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20953 \begin_layout Standard
20960 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20961 of the image in the output.
20962 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20966 \begin_inset space ~
20970 \begin_inset space ~
20979 \begin_inset space ~
20983 \begin_inset space ~
20987 \begin_inset space ~
20992 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20993 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21001 \begin_layout Standard
21007 \begin_inset space ~
21011 \begin_inset space ~
21016 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21017 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21019 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21024 \begin_inset space ~
21029 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21030 with the image size is printed.
21033 \begin_layout Standard
21036 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21037 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21039 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21042 \begin_layout Standard
21044 \begin_inset Graphics
21045 filename ../clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21053 \begin_layout Standard
21056 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21057 the image into a float, see section
21060 \begin_inset space ~
21064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21066 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21073 \begin_layout Subsection
21075 \begin_inset Index idx
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21087 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21094 \begin_layout Standard
21097 You can insert images in any known file format.
21098 But as we explained in section
21099 \begin_inset space ~
21103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21105 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21109 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21111 therefore uses the program
21115 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21116 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21117 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21118 \begin_inset space ~
21122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21124 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21131 \begin_layout Standard
21134 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21137 \begin_layout Description
21141 \begin_inset space ~
21144 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21145 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21146 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21150 Graphics Interchange Format
21151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21154 (GIF, file extension
21155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21169 \begin_inset Index idx
21172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21208 Portable Network Graphics
21209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21212 (PNG, file extension
21213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21227 \begin_inset Index idx
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21266 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21270 (JPG, file extension
21271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21297 \begin_inset Index idx
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21333 \begin_layout Description
21337 \begin_inset space ~
21340 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21342 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21343 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21344 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21345 \begin_inset Newline newline
21348 Scalable image formats can be
21349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21352 Scalable Vector Graphics
21353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21356 (SVG, file extension
21357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21371 \begin_inset Index idx
21374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21410 Encapsulated PostScript
21411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21414 (EPS, file extension
21415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21429 \begin_inset Index idx
21432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21468 Portable Document Format
21469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21472 (PDF, file extension
21473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21487 \begin_inset Index idx
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21509 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21510 result will not be scalable.
21511 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21527 \begin_layout Standard
21530 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21537 \begin_layout Subsection
21538 إعدادات مجموعة الصور
21539 \begin_inset Index idx
21542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21543 صور ! إعدادات المجموعات
21551 \begin_layout Standard
21554 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21556 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21557 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21559 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21560 need to manually change each of them.
21564 \begin_layout Standard
21567 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21570 \begin_inset space ~
21574 \begin_inset space ~
21586 \begin_inset space ~
21590 \begin_inset space ~
21596 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21597 and checking the name of the desired group.
21600 \begin_layout Section
21602 \begin_inset Index idx
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21621 \begin_layout Standard
21624 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21629 arg "tabular-insert"
21636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21640 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21641 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21642 from the rest of the table.
21643 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21644 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21646 Here is an example table:
21649 \begin_layout Standard
21651 \begin_inset Tabular
21652 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21653 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21654 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21655 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21656 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21657 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21817 \begin_layout Subsection
21821 \begin_layout Standard
21824 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21827 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21831 This brings up the table dialog.
21832 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21833 cursor is placed currently.
21834 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21835 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21836 done on all of your selection.
21839 \begin_layout Standard
21842 In addition to the table dialog, the
21845 \begin_inset space ~
21850 helps you in setting table properties.
21851 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21854 \begin_layout Standard
21860 \begin_inset space ~
21865 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21866 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21867 current cell respectively.
21868 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21870 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21871 of text, see section
21874 \begin_inset space ~
21878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21880 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21887 \begin_layout Standard
21890 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21891 using the check box
21900 This will merge the cells to
21904 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21905 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21906 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21907 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21908 in the last row without the upper border:
21911 \begin_layout Standard
21915 \begin_inset Tabular
21916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21917 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21919 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21920 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21921 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21934 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21945 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22073 \begin_layout Standard
22076 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22077 -arguments for the table.
22078 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22079 explained in the chapter
22086 \begin_inset space ~
22092 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22093 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22094 but are visible in the output.
22097 \begin_layout Standard
22100 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22109 Most DVI-viewers are
22113 able to display rotations.
22121 \begin_layout Standard
22128 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22133 adds lines for all cell borders.
22136 \begin_layout Subsection
22137 الجداول متعددة-الصفحات
22138 \begin_inset Index idx
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 جداول ! صفحات متعددة
22148 \begin_inset Index idx
22151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 جداول متعددة الصفحات
22160 \begin_layout Standard
22163 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22166 \begin_inset space ~
22170 \begin_inset space ~
22178 \begin_inset space ~
22183 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22184 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22187 \begin_layout Description
22193 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22194 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22195 Except for the first page, if
22198 \begin_inset space ~
22206 \begin_layout Description
22211 \begin_inset space ~
22216 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22217 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22220 \begin_layout Description
22226 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22227 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22228 except for the last page, if
22231 \begin_inset space ~
22239 \begin_layout Description
22244 \begin_inset space ~
22249 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22250 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22253 \begin_layout Description
22256 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22257 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22263 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22266 \begin_inset space ~
22274 \begin_layout Standard
22277 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22278 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22279 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22285 In this context, first means first in this order:
22288 \begin_inset space ~
22300 \begin_inset space ~
22305 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22308 \begin_layout Standard
22312 \begin_inset Tabular
22313 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22314 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22315 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22316 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22317 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22318 <row endfirsthead="true">
22319 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22331 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22340 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 <row endfirsthead="true">
22351 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22363 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22372 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <row endhead="true">
22386 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22408 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 <row endhead="true">
22419 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22440 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <row endfoot="true">
22454 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23603 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23623 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23778 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23922 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23994 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24066 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24606 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24642 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24749 <row endlastfoot="true">
24750 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24771 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24788 \begin_layout Subsection
24790 \begin_inset Index idx
24793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24802 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24809 \begin_layout Standard
24812 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24813 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24814 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24815 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24819 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24822 \begin_layout Standard
24825 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24826 for the column in the table dialog.
24827 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24828 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24832 \begin_layout Standard
24836 \begin_inset Tabular
24837 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24838 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24840 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24841 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24862 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24935 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24994 This is longer now.
24999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25053 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25054 This is longer now.
25059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25086 \begin_layout Standard
25089 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25090 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25097 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25098 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25104 Selection with the mouse or with
25108 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25109 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25110 the selection from outside the table.
25113 \begin_layout Section
25115 \begin_inset Index idx
25118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25134 \begin_layout Subsection
25138 \begin_layout Standard
25141 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25142 have a fixed location.
25144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25151 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25159 \begin_inset space ~
25164 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25165 too many notes on the current page.
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25171 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25172 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25173 and pages without text.
25174 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25175 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25176 Floats are therefore numbered.
25177 Referencing is described in section
25178 \begin_inset space ~
25182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25184 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25191 \begin_layout Standard
25194 To insert a float, use the menu
25196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25200 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25201 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25203 After the label you can insert the caption text
25206 \begin_inset Index idx
25209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25217 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25218 paragraph within the float.
25219 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25220 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25221 left-clicking on the box label.
25222 A closed float box looks like this:
25225 \begin_inset Graphics
25226 filename ../clipart/float.png
25233 – a gray button with a red label.
25236 \begin_layout Standard
25239 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25241 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25244 \begin_layout Subsection
25245 تعويم الرسم التوضيحي
25246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25248 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25253 \begin_inset Index idx
25256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25265 \begin_layout Standard
25269 \begin_inset space ~
25273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25275 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25279 was created using the menu
25281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25282 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25290 arg "float-insert figure"
25296 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25307 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25313 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25314 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25316 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25318 \begin_inset space ~
25328 arg "layout-paragraph"
25336 \begin_layout Standard
25339 \begin_inset Float figure
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Graphics
25347 filename ../clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25366 name "fig:A-star-in"
25383 \begin_layout Standard
25386 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25387 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25402 ) and refer to it using the menu
25404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25412 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25418 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25419 vague references like
25420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25427 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25428 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25438 For more about cross-references, see section
25439 \begin_inset space ~
25443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25445 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25452 \begin_layout Standard
25455 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25456 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25457 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25458 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25459 as described in section
25460 \begin_inset space ~
25464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25466 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25472 \begin_inset space ~
25476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25478 reference "fig:Two-images"
25482 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25483 You can also set the images one below the other.
25485 \begin_inset space ~
25489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25491 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25498 reference "fig:Star"
25502 are the subfigures.
25505 \begin_layout Standard
25508 \begin_inset Float figure
25513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25516 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25520 \begin_inset Float figure
25525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25528 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25535 name "fig:Undefinable"
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25550 \begin_inset Graphics
25551 filename ..c/clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25563 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25567 \begin_inset Float figure
25572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25575 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25597 \begin_inset Graphics
25598 filename ../clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25610 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25619 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25626 name "fig:Two-images"
25643 \begin_layout Subsection
25645 \begin_inset Index idx
25648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25657 \begin_layout Standard
25660 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25663 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25666 or the toolbar button
25671 arg "float-insert table"
25677 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25678 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25679 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25681 \begin_inset space ~
25685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25687 reference "tab:Table-float"
25694 \begin_layout Standard
25697 \begin_inset Float table
25702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25712 name "tab:Table-float"
25724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25728 \begin_inset Tabular
25729 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25730 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25731 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25732 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25733 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25867 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25889 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25892 \end{array}\right]$
25900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25914 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25935 \begin_layout Subsection
25937 \begin_inset Index idx
25940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25949 \begin_layout Standard
25953 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25954 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25955 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25957 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25965 \begin_inset space ~
25973 \begin_layout Section
25975 \begin_inset Index idx
25978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25987 \begin_layout Standard
25991 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25993 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25994 \begin_inset space \space{}
26001 \begin_layout Standard
26004 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26005 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26011 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26012 and its alignment within the page.
26015 \begin_layout Standard
26017 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26027 height_special "totalheight"
26032 backgroundcolor "none"
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26038 This is a minipage.
26039 The text is set in an italic style.
26042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26045 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26046 another formatting.
26054 \begin_layout Standard
26055 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26060 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26064 as described in section
26065 \begin_inset space ~
26069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26071 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26078 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26084 \begin_layout Standard
26087 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26097 height_special "totalheight"
26102 backgroundcolor "none"
26105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26108 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26109 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26115 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26119 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26129 height_special "totalheight"
26134 backgroundcolor "none"
26137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26140 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26141 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26149 \begin_layout Standard
26150 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26156 \begin_layout Standard
26159 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26161 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26168 \begin_inset space ~
26176 \begin_layout Chapter
26178 \begin_inset Index idx
26181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26188 \begin_inset Index idx
26191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26222 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26229 \begin_layout Standard
26232 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26237 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26240 \begin_layout Section
26241 محرر الرياضيات الأساسي
26242 \begin_inset Index idx
26245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26254 \begin_layout Standard
26257 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26278 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26280 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26281 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26282 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26290 \begin_layout Standard
26293 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26297 \begin_inset space ~
26302 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26305 \begin_layout Standard
26308 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26309 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26312 \begin_layout Standard
26315 This is a line with an inline formula
26316 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26322 \begin_layout Standard
26325 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26326 paragraph, like this one:
26329 \begin_inset Formula
26338 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26341 \begin_layout Standard
26345 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26347 For example, typing
26348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26361 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26362 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26366 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26369 \begin_inset space ~
26377 \begin_layout Subsection
26379 \begin_inset Index idx
26382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26391 \begin_layout Standard
26394 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26395 achieved with the arrow keys.
26397 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26398 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26403 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26404 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26408 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26412 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26415 \end{array}\right]$
26423 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26428 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26429 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26432 \begin_layout Standard
26438 , printed in this document as
26439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26443 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26450 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26451 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26452 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26457 For example, if you want
26458 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26466 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26476 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26480 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26485 , since in the latter case only the
26488 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26493 will be under the square root sign:
26494 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26500 \begin_layout Standard
26503 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26507 \begin_inset Formula
26509 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26520 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26521 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26524 \begin_layout Subsection
26528 \begin_layout Standard
26531 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26532 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26536 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26537 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26538 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26539 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26540 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26544 \begin_layout Subsection
26545 النص العلوي والسفلي
26546 \begin_inset Index idx
26549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26556 \begin_inset Index idx
26559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 \begin_layout Standard
26571 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26576 arg "math-superscript"
26586 arg "math-subscript"
26591 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26593 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26596 , type in a formula
26599 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26609 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26615 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26619 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26625 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26631 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26640 , you have to use an extra
26644 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26645 For example, if you want
26646 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26652 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26658 Subscripts are similar: To get
26659 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26665 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26673 \begin_layout Subsection
26675 \begin_inset Index idx
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 \begin_layout Standard
26690 Create a fraction either with the command
26696 or by using the icon
26701 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26709 \begin_inset space ~
26715 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26716 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26717 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26722 To move back up, press
26727 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26730 \begin_inset Formula
26732 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26735 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26743 \begin_layout Subsection
26745 \begin_inset Index idx
26748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26757 \begin_layout Standard
26760 Roots can be created using the
26763 \begin_inset space ~
26773 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26783 arg "math-insert \\root"
26807 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26813 always produces a square root.
26816 \begin_layout Subsection
26818 \begin_inset Index idx
26821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26828 \begin_inset Index idx
26831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26840 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26847 \begin_layout Standard
26851 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26855 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26858 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26859 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26860 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26861 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26862 The sum operator will automatically place its
26863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26870 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26872 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26878 \begin_inset Formula
26880 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26887 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26894 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26896 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26897 behind the operator and using the menu
26899 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26900 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26902 \begin_inset space ~
26906 \begin_inset space ~
26924 \begin_layout Standard
26927 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26938 \begin_inset Index idx
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26950 \begin_inset Formula
26952 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26957 which will place the
26958 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26970 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26971 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26977 \begin_layout Standard
26980 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26987 Have a look at section
26988 \begin_inset space ~
26992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26994 reference "subsec:Functions"
26998 for an explanation of function macros.
27001 \begin_layout Subsection
27003 \begin_inset Index idx
27006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27015 \begin_layout Standard
27018 Most math symbols can be found in the
27021 \begin_inset space ~
27026 under one of several categories; including
27043 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27047 \begin_layout Standard
27050 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27051 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27052 don't have to use the
27055 \begin_inset space ~
27060 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27062 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27065 \begin_layout Subsection
27067 \begin_inset Index idx
27070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27079 \begin_layout Standard
27082 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27090 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27098 \begin_inset space ~
27108 arg "math-insert \\space"
27114 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27115 For example, the sequence
27120 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27123 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27127 \begin_inset Graphics
27128 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27135 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27136 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27137 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27138 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27139 , because they are negative
27141 Here are two examples:
27144 \begin_layout Standard
27155 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27161 \begin_layout Standard
27172 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27178 \begin_layout Subsection
27180 \begin_inset Index idx
27183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27192 name "subsec:Functions"
27199 \begin_layout Standard
27205 \begin_inset space ~
27210 contains under the button
27215 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27220 a number of function macros, such as
27221 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27225 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27233 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27240 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27241 avoid confusions, because
27242 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27246 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27252 \begin_layout Standard
27255 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27257 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27261 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27267 \begin_layout Standard
27270 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27271 are placed, as described in section
27272 \begin_inset space ~
27276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27278 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27285 \begin_layout Subsection
27287 \begin_inset Index idx
27290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27299 \begin_layout Standard
27302 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27304 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27305 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27306 commands, for example, to enter
27307 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27310 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27311 Our example is entered by typing
27316 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27323 \begin_inset space ~
27327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27329 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27333 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27336 \begin_layout Standard
27339 \begin_inset Float table
27344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27347 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27354 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27358 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27370 \begin_inset Tabular
27371 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27372 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27373 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27468 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27582 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27639 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27696 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27753 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27810 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27867 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27924 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27973 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27994 \begin_layout Standard
27997 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28000 \begin_inset space ~
28010 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28015 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28019 \begin_layout Section
28021 \begin_inset Index idx
28024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28031 \begin_inset Index idx
28034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28043 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28050 \begin_layout Standard
28053 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28055 For some purposes, using just the keys
28060 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28061 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28062 toolbar delimiter icon
28067 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28073 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28074 \begin_inset Formula
28076 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28084 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28085 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28091 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28096 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28102 \begin_inset Formula
28104 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28112 \begin_layout Standard
28115 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28116 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28123 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28124 left side and right side.
28125 If you use the option
28128 \begin_inset space ~
28133 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28134 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28136 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28141 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28142 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28148 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28149 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28150 is to go inside the brackets.
28151 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28156 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28157 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28158 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28164 arg "math-delim ( )"
28170 \begin_layout Section
28171 المصفوفات والمعادلات متعددة الأسطر
28172 \begin_inset Index idx
28175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28182 \begin_inset Index idx
28185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28192 \begin_inset Index idx
28195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28196 رياضيات ! معادلة متعددة الأسطر
28204 \begin_layout Standard
28207 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28211 \begin_inset space ~
28221 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28227 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28228 Here is an example:
28229 \begin_inset Formula
28231 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28240 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28241 \begin_inset space ~
28245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28247 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28252 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28253 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28254 This alignment is set in the box
28259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28308 for every column as default.
28309 For example, the sequence
28310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28321 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28322 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28323 corresponds to the relevant column.
28324 The result will look like this:
28325 \begin_inset Formula
28328 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28329 column & has & has\,right\\
28330 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28339 \begin_layout Standard
28342 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28347 arg "newline-insert newline"
28352 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28353 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28355 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28358 or the math toolbar.
28361 \begin_layout Standard
28364 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28365 It can be created with the menu
28367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28368 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28370 \begin_inset space ~
28382 Here is an example:
28383 \begin_inset Formula
28397 \begin_layout Standard
28400 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28403 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28408 arg "newline-insert newline"
28414 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28421 arg "newline-insert newline"
28426 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28434 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28435 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28436 A new row is created by every further entry of
28441 arg "newline-insert newline"
28447 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28448 Here is an example:
28449 \begin_inset Formula
28451 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28452 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28457 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28458 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28459 \begin_inset Formula
28461 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28469 \begin_layout Standard
28472 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28479 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28480 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28483 reference "eq:asquared"
28488 The other types are described in section
28489 \begin_inset space ~
28493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28495 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28502 \begin_layout Section
28503 المعادلة المرقمة والعلامة المرجعية
28504 \begin_inset Index idx
28507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28508 رياضيات ! معادلة مرقمة
28514 \begin_inset Index idx
28517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28518 رياضيات ! معادلة مرجعية
28524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28526 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28533 \begin_layout Standard
28536 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28539 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28541 \begin_inset space ~
28545 \begin_inset space ~
28555 arg "math-number-toggle"
28561 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28562 within parentheses.
28563 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28564 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28565 the document class.
28566 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28567 separated by a dot:
28568 \begin_inset Formula
28580 arg "math-number-toggle"
28585 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28586 You can only number displayed formulas.
28589 \begin_layout Standard
28592 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28595 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28597 \begin_inset space ~
28601 \begin_inset space ~
28611 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28616 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28617 \begin_inset Formula
28620 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28626 To number all lines use the shortcut
28631 arg "math-number-toggle"
28637 \begin_layout Standard
28640 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28643 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28644 A label is inserted with the menu
28646 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28659 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28660 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28661 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28673 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28674 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28675 We inserted in the following example the label
28676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28683 in the second line:
28684 \begin_inset Formula
28686 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28687 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28692 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28693 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28694 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28698 \begin_inset space ~
28708 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28714 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28715 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28716 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28717 as the formula number:
28720 \begin_layout Standard
28723 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28726 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28733 \begin_layout Standard
28736 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28737 's cross-reference box are described in section
28738 \begin_inset space ~
28742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28744 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28749 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28757 \begin_layout Standard
28760 and we can replace the equation number with any text by
28764 tag* which writing in the end of formula.
28767 \begin_layout Section
28768 تعيين المستخدم لماكرو رياضي
28769 \begin_inset Index idx
28772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28781 \begin_layout Standard
28785 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28786 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28787 Math macros are explained in section
28790 \begin_inset space ~
28802 \begin_layout Section
28806 \begin_layout Subsection
28808 \begin_inset Index idx
28811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28820 \begin_layout Standard
28823 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28824 To set a font in a formula, use the
28827 \begin_inset space ~
28837 arg "math-insert \\font"
28842 , or enter its command, listed in table
28843 \begin_inset space ~
28847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28849 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28856 \begin_layout Standard
28859 \begin_inset Float table
28864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28867 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28874 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28878 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28890 \begin_inset Tabular
28891 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28892 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28893 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28894 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28931 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28961 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28991 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29026 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29056 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29086 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29122 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29152 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29187 \begin_layout Standard
29190 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29199 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29215 \begin_layout Standard
29218 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29219 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29224 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29225 space when you need a space in the box.
29226 Here is an example where
29227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29238 denotes the set of numbers:
29239 \begin_inset Formula
29241 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29249 \begin_layout Standard
29252 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29253 You can, for example, put a character in
29262 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29266 \begin_inset Newline newline
29269 So it is better not to use this feature.
29272 \begin_layout Standard
29275 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29276 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29280 \begin_inset Newline newline
29283 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29289 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29290 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29296 \begin_layout Standard
29304 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29307 \begin_layout Standard
29310 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29312 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29313 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29315 \begin_inset space ~
29323 \begin_layout Subsection
29325 \begin_inset Index idx
29328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29337 \begin_layout Standard
29340 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29342 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29346 \begin_inset space ~
29350 \begin_inset space ~
29358 \begin_inset space ~
29368 arg "math-insert \\font"
29374 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29375 in black instead of blue.
29376 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29377 Here is an example:
29378 \begin_inset Formula
29381 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29382 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29391 \begin_layout Subsection
29393 \begin_inset Index idx
29396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29405 \begin_layout Standard
29408 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29409 automatically chosen in most situations.
29427 For most characters,
29435 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29436 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29441 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29442 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29443 thinks are appropriate.
29444 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29449 arg "math-insert \\style"
29455 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29456 For example, you can set
29457 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29460 , which is normally in
29469 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29473 The four styles are used in the following example:
29476 \begin_layout Standard
29479 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29483 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29487 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29491 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29497 \begin_layout Standard
29500 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29501 is set in a particular size with the menu
29503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29505 \begin_inset space ~
29510 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29511 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29512 will be adjusted to correspond.
29513 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29524 \begin_layout Standard
29529 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29535 \begin_layout Section
29537 \begin_inset Index idx
29540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29547 \begin_inset Index idx
29550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29559 \begin_layout Standard
29563 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29564 that are in common use.
29567 \begin_layout Subsection
29571 \begin_layout Standard
29574 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29575 the document by selecting the checkbox
29578 \begin_inset space ~
29582 \begin_inset space ~
29586 \begin_inset space ~
29593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29598 \begin_inset Index idx
29601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29612 \begin_inset space ~
29618 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29619 -errors in formulas,
29620 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29623 \begin_layout Subsection
29624 أنواع معادلات حزمة AMS
29625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29627 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29632 \begin_inset Index idx
29635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29636 رياضيات ! معادلة متعددة الأسطر
29644 \begin_layout Standard
29647 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29648 provides a selection of different formula types.
29650 allows you to choose between
29671 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29672 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29679 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29682 \begin_layout Chapter
29686 \begin_layout Section
29688 \begin_inset Index idx
29691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29700 name "sec:Cross-References"
29707 \begin_layout Standard
29710 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29711 's strengths is cross-references.
29712 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29714 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29715 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29716 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29719 \begin_layout Enumerate
29723 \begin_layout Enumerate
29724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29726 name "enu:Second-item"
29733 \begin_layout Enumerate
29737 \begin_layout Standard
29740 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29745 or by pressing the toolbar button
29756 A gray label box like this:
29759 \begin_inset Graphics
29760 filename ../clipart/label.png
29766 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29768 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29803 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29804 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29820 \begin_layout Standard
29823 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29825 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29828 or the toolbar button
29833 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29839 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29842 \begin_inset Graphics
29843 filename ../clipart/reference.png
29849 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29851 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29864 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29868 \begin_layout Standard
29871 As an alternative to
29873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29876 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29881 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29882 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29884 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29900 \begin_layout Standard
29903 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29906 \begin_inset space ~
29910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29912 reference "enu:Second-item"
29919 \begin_layout Standard
29922 It is recommended to use a protected space
29926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29929 described in section
29930 \begin_inset space ~
29934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29936 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29945 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29946 line breaks between them.
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29952 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29955 \begin_layout Description
29958 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default
29961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29963 reference "fig:Two-images"
29970 \begin_layout Description
29973 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29974 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29988 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29995 \begin_layout Description
29998 <page>: prints the page number: Page
30001 \begin_inset space ~
30005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30006 LatexCommand pageref
30007 reference "fig:Two-images"
30014 \begin_layout Description
30018 \begin_inset space ~
30022 \begin_inset space ~
30025 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number
30028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30029 LatexCommand vpageref
30030 reference "fig:Two-images"
30035 \begin_inset Newline newline
30040 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30041 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30042 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30043 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30044 it prints “on the next page”.
30045 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30048 \begin_layout Description
30052 \begin_inset space ~
30056 \begin_inset space ~
30060 \begin_inset space ~
30063 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30066 reference "fig:Two-images"
30071 \begin_inset Newline newline
30074 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30080 ; otherwise it behaves like
30084 \begin_inset space ~
30088 \begin_inset space ~
30097 \begin_layout Description
30101 \begin_inset space ~
30104 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30105 \begin_inset Newline newline
30109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30118 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30129 \begin_inset Index idx
30132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30133 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
30139 \begin_inset Index idx
30142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30145 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
30158 \begin_inset Newline newline
30161 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30162 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30165 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30170 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30178 is the default and preferred because
30182 supports only English documents.
30183 The format is specified by using the command
30195 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30196 preamble of the document.
30197 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30215 \begin_inset Newline newline
30222 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30227 \begin_inset Newline newline
30238 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30239 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30241 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30242 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30247 , you might do so as follows:
30248 \begin_inset Newline newline
30255 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
30260 \begin_inset Newline newline
30263 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30264 the package documentation
30267 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30269 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30275 \begin_inset Newline newline
30288 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30295 \begin_layout Description
30299 \begin_inset space ~
30302 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference
30305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30306 LatexCommand nameref
30307 reference "fig:Two-images"
30314 \begin_layout Description
30318 \begin_inset space ~
30321 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30322 label for the reference
30325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30326 LatexCommand labelonly
30327 reference "fig:Two-images"
30332 \begin_inset Newline newline
30337 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30338 Code, if you want to issue a command
30339 that \SpecialChar LyX
30345 , then you may want to use the
30348 \begin_inset space ~
30353 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30363 This is the form needed for e.
30364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30368 \begin_inset space \space{}
30375 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30376 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30378 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30382 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30386 \begin_layout Standard
30389 You can only use the style
30393 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30397 is always possible.
30400 \begin_layout Standard
30403 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30404 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30406 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30409 \begin_inset space ~
30413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30415 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30425 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30429 \begin_inset space ~
30433 \begin_inset space ~
30438 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30439 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30442 \begin_inset space ~
30447 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30448 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30453 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30459 \begin_layout Standard
30462 You can change labels at any time.
30463 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30464 do not need to think about this.
30467 \begin_layout Standard
30470 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30472 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30479 References are described in detail in the section
30480 \begin_inset space ~
30490 \begin_inset space ~
30498 \begin_layout Section
30499 جدول المحتويات والقوائم الأخرى
30500 \begin_inset Index idx
30503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30510 \begin_inset Index idx
30513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30520 \begin_inset Index idx
30523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30539 \begin_layout Subsection
30541 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30543 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30553 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30555 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30556 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30558 \begin_inset space ~
30562 \begin_inset space ~
30568 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30570 If you click on it, the
30574 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30575 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30576 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30578 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30580 \begin_inset space ~
30585 that is described in section
30588 \begin_inset space ~
30592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30594 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30601 \begin_layout Standard
30604 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30605 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30607 \begin_inset space ~
30611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30613 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30617 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30619 \begin_inset space ~
30623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30625 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30629 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30631 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30634 \begin_layout Subsection
30635 قائمة الصور، الجداول، اللوغاريتمات
30636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30638 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30645 \begin_layout Standard
30648 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30650 You can insert them via the
30652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30656 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30659 \begin_layout Section
30660 الروابط والروابط التشعبية
30661 \begin_inset Index idx
30664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30671 \begin_inset Index idx
30674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30683 \begin_layout Subsection
30685 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30694 \begin_layout Standard
30697 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30705 \begin_layout Standard
30708 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30712 \begin_inset Flex URL
30715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30717 https://www.lyx.org
30725 \begin_layout Standard
30728 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30734 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30738 \begin_layout Standard
30741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30750 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30759 \begin_layout Subsection
30761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30763 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30770 \begin_layout Standard
30773 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30775 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30778 or with the toolbar button
30789 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30798 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30799 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this
30802 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30804 name "LyX's homepage"
30805 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30812 an Email address like this:
30813 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30815 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30816 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30822 , or a link to a file.
30827 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30835 \begin_layout Standard
30838 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30851 to the link target.
30854 \begin_layout Standard
30857 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30858 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30859 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30860 the text style dialog.
30861 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30865 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30867 name "LyX's homepage"
30868 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30876 \begin_layout Standard
30879 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30883 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30885 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30886 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30890 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30892 \begin_inset Newline newline
30900 \begin_inset Newline newline
30907 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30910 \begin_layout Section
30912 \begin_inset Index idx
30915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30924 name "sec:Appendices"
30931 \begin_layout Standard
30934 Appendices are created with the menu
30936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30938 \begin_inset space ~
30942 \begin_inset space ~
30948 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30949 as the appendix part of the book.
30950 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30953 \begin_layout Standard
30956 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30957 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30958 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30959 and the subsection number.
30960 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30964 \begin_layout Standard
30968 \begin_inset space ~
30972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30974 reference "chap:Credits"
30979 \begin_inset space ~
30983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30985 reference "subsec:Export"
30992 \begin_layout Section
30994 \begin_inset Index idx
30997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31006 name "sec:Bibliography"
31013 \begin_layout Standard
31016 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31018 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31019 \begin_inset space ~
31023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31025 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31032 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31037 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31038 \begin_inset space ~
31042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31044 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31049 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31050 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31051 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31055 using a bibliography database.
31058 \begin_layout Standard
31061 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31062 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31066 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31067 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31068 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31069 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31070 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31073 \begin_layout Subsection
31075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31077 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31084 \begin_layout Standard
31091 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31093 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31102 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31104 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31105 of ASCII characters only.
31109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31113 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31116 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31122 \begin_inset Newline newline
31126 \begin_inset Flex URL
31129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31131 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
31143 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31153 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31154 \begin_inset Newline newline
31161 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31162 the number of the entry.
31167 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31176 \begin_layout Standard
31179 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31181 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31184 or the toolbar button
31189 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31195 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31196 containing the available citations.
31197 Select one or more keys from the list and
31207 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31208 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31212 \begin_layout Standard
31215 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31216 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31217 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31229 \begin_layout Standard
31235 Companion Second Edition
31238 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31240 key "latexcompanion"
31248 \begin_layout Standard
31251 The \SpecialChar LyX
31252 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31253 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31263 \begin_layout Standard
31266 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31275 \begin_inset Index idx
31278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
31288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31299 Author A and Author B(Year)
31300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31307 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31309 Then, if you select
31312 \begin_inset space ~
31317 in the document settings
31320 \begin_inset Index idx
31323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31333 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31335 \begin_inset space ~
31341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31343 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31350 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
31353 \begin_layout Standard
31356 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31359 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31361 \begin_inset space ~
31371 arg "layout-paragraph"
31377 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31380 \begin_layout Subsection
31381 قاعدة بيانات ثبت المراجع
31382 \begin_inset Index idx
31385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31386 ثبت المراجع ! قاعدة البيانات
31392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31394 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31401 \begin_layout Standard
31404 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31412 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31414 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31415 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31420 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31422 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31423 your working field in a database.
31424 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31425 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31426 list for that document.
31427 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31431 \begin_layout Standard
31434 The database is a text file with the file extension
31435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31446 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31447 The format is explained in
31450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31459 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31461 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31463 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31469 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31470 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31471 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31475 \begin_inset Flex URL
31478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31480 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31488 \begin_layout Standard
31492 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31493 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31494 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31496 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31498 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31499 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31500 Those are addressed by
31506 \begin_inset Index idx
31509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31510 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
31518 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31519 (although it has been significantly
31520 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31532 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31533 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31534 might conversely fail to correctly
31535 handle databases that use specific
31544 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31548 \begin_layout Standard
31551 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31556 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31558 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31564 \begin_inset Index idx
31567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31582 \begin_inset space ~
31587 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31596 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31598 \begin_inset Index idx
31601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31602 ثبت المراجع ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31611 \begin_layout Standard
31614 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31617 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31622 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31624 \begin_inset space ~
31630 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31631 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31639 Add bibliography to TOC
31641 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31646 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31647 in the document or just the cited references.
31650 \begin_layout Standard
31653 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31654 style file is a text file with the file extension
31655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31666 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31667 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31668 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31669 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31671 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31679 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31680 \begin_inset Newline newline
31684 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31686 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31696 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31701 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31705 \begin_layout Standard
31708 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31711 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31713 \begin_inset Index idx
31716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31717 ثبت المراجع ! Biblatex
31723 \begin_inset Index idx
31726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31727 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
31735 \begin_layout Standard
31738 Accessing a database via
31742 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31750 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31752 \begin_inset space ~
31758 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31759 you cannot select a
31764 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31774 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31787 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31788 file (text file with the file extension
31789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31800 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31801 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31803 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31807 \begin_layout Standard
31813 styles are not set in the
31816 \begin_inset space ~
31821 dialog, but in the document settings
31824 \begin_inset Index idx
31827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31835 However, in the dialog in the
31839 field, which is only visible if you use
31843 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31844 example how its heading will appear).
31845 These options are deescribed in detail in the
31850 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31860 \begin_layout Standard
31863 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31866 \begin_inset space ~
31870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31872 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31886 \begin_layout Standard
31889 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31890 uses a bibliography processor,
31891 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31892 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31893 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31895 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31896 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31899 \begin_layout Standard
31902 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31904 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31905 You can do this on a general level in
31907 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31908 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31909 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31912 or for individual documents in
31914 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31915 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31919 The following variants are available by default:
31922 \begin_layout Description
31925 biber a specific, modern processor
31928 \begin_inset Index idx
31931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31939 developed exclusively for
31943 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31949 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31954 makes use of; if you use the
31958 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31965 \begin_layout Description
31968 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31969 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31970 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31974 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31977 \begin_layout Description
31980 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31981 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31985 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31989 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31993 features are supported.
31996 \begin_layout Standard
31999 By default (with the
32005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32006 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32019 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32020 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32021 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32024 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32025 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32038 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32039 -based bibliography styles).
32040 This should suit most needs.
32043 \begin_layout Standard
32046 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32047 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32048 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32053 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32054 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32055 You can adjust it in
32057 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32058 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32059 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32065 \begin_layout Standard
32068 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32069 can add below the selection.
32070 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32071 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32079 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32089 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32093 \begin_layout Standard
32097 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32099 These are explained in detail in section
32101 Customizing Bibliographies
32105 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32110 Additional Features
32115 \begin_layout Subsection
32117 \begin_inset Index idx
32120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32121 ثبت المراجع ! هيئة الاستشهاد
32127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32129 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32136 \begin_layout Standard
32139 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32140 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32144 \begin_inset space \space{}
32147 numerical citation (as
32148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32155 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32163 ) or author-year citations (as
32164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32173 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32177 \begin_layout Standard
32180 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32183 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32184 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32189 \begin_inset Index idx
32192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32200 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32206 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32207 labels, is there to use
32210 \begin_inset space ~
32221 \begin_inset space ~
32226 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32229 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32236 \begin_layout Standard
32239 With a bibliography database (see
32240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32242 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32249 ) one has in contrary to the
32253 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32254 These style formats are available:
32257 \begin_layout Description
32261 \begin_inset space ~
32264 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32265 -based approached without any additional packages
32266 (simple numeric citations).
32269 \begin_layout Description
32272 Biblatex loads the package
32279 \begin_inset Index idx
32282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32283 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
32290 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32292 Biblatex citation style
32296 Biblatex bibliography style
32299 Options to the package
32303 can be entered in the
32310 \begin_layout Description
32314 \begin_inset space ~
32318 \begin_inset space ~
32321 mode) loads the package
32325 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32326 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32338 behavior very closely.
32343 this option has some additional styles.
32348 styles are also supported by this variant.
32351 \begin_layout Description
32355 \begin_inset space ~
32358 (BibTeX) loads the package
32365 \begin_inset Index idx
32368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32369 حزمة لتيك ! jurabib
32376 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32379 \begin_layout Description
32383 \begin_inset space ~
32386 (BibTeX) loads the package
32393 \begin_inset Index idx
32396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32404 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32407 \begin_layout Standard
32418 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32420 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32429 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32431 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32432 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32434 Biblatex citation style
32437 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32443 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32447 \begin_layout Standard
32450 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32451 are available in the
32456 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32457 a name prefix such as
32458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32473 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32478 \begin_inset space \space{}
32482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32493 \begin_layout Standard
32496 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32502 \begin_inset space \space{}
32505 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32511 \begin_inset space \space{}
32515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32527 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32531 \begin_inset space ~
32539 \begin_inset space ~
32545 Here is a simple example where the text
32546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32550 \begin_inset space ~
32554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32557 appears after the reference:
32560 \begin_layout Quote
32566 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32569 key "latexcompanion"
32577 \begin_layout Standard
32580 All styles except for
32584 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32594 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32598 \begin_layout Standard
32601 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32602 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32603 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32608 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32609 multi-citation (so-called
32610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32613 qualified citation lists
32614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32620 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32625 dialog will display three columns in the field
32632 \begin_inset space ~
32640 \begin_inset space ~
32648 \begin_inset space ~
32654 If you double-click on an item's
32657 \begin_inset space ~
32665 \begin_inset space ~
32670 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32673 General text before
32679 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32682 \begin_layout Section
32684 \begin_inset Index idx
32687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32703 \begin_layout Standard
32706 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32710 \begin_inset space ~
32715 or the toolbar button
32726 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32727 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32728 by \SpecialChar LyX
32729 as the index entry.
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32735 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32738 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32740 \begin_inset space ~
32746 A light blue box labeled
32747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32758 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32759 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32763 \begin_layout Standard
32766 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32767 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32768 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32769 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32771 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32773 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32781 \begin_layout Subsection
32783 \begin_inset Index idx
32786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32795 \begin_layout Standard
32798 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32800 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32801 lists under the entry
32802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32810 First we create the entry
32811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32819 \begin_inset space ~
32823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32825 reference "subsec:Lists"
32830 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32831 \begin_inset space ~
32835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32837 reference "sec:Itemize"
32841 , we insert the command
32844 \begin_layout Standard
32851 \begin_layout Standard
32857 \begin_layout Standard
32864 \begin_layout Standard
32867 for the enumerated list in section
32868 \begin_inset space ~
32872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32874 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32881 \begin_layout Standard
32884 The exclamation mark
32885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32892 marks the grouping levels.
32893 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32894 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32895 If we don't have an index entry for
32896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32903 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32906 \begin_layout Subsection
32908 \begin_inset Index idx
32911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32920 \begin_layout Standard
32923 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32925 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32926 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32927 an index entry in section
32928 \begin_inset space ~
32932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32934 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32941 \begin_layout Standard
32945 Paragraph environments|(
32948 \begin_layout Standard
32951 and another entry at the end of section
32952 \begin_inset space ~
32956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32958 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32965 \begin_layout Standard
32969 Paragraph environments|)
32972 \begin_layout Standard
32976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32999 respectively start and end the index range.
33000 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33001 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33002 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33003 An example is the index entry
33004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33007 Document ! Settings
33008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33014 \begin_layout Subsection
33016 \begin_inset Index idx
33019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33020 فهرس ! إشارة مرجعية
33028 \begin_layout Standard
33031 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33032 We referred for example in the index entry
33033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33041 \begin_inset space ~
33045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33047 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33051 ) to the index entry
33052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33059 in the same section using the entry
33062 \begin_layout Standard
33066 GIF|see{Image formats}
33069 \begin_layout Standard
33072 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33074 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33075 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33078 \begin_layout Subsection
33080 \begin_inset Index idx
33083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33092 \begin_layout Standard
33095 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33096 follow the rules for the index order.
33097 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33105 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33107 \begin_inset space ~
33111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33113 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33122 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33123 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33150 \begin_inset Index idx
33153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33160 \begin_inset Index idx
33163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33170 \begin_inset Index idx
33173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33174 مدخل مجسم ! الفا@غاما
33181 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33182 maïs, maison, maître.
33183 To achieve this, we use the command
33186 \begin_layout Standard
33190 previous entry@current entry
33193 \begin_layout Standard
33196 In our case we want to have
33197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33209 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33212 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33215 \begin_layout Standard
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33225 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33226 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33228 See the next subsection for an example.
33231 \begin_layout Subsection
33233 \begin_inset Index idx
33236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33245 \begin_layout Standard
33248 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog
33251 \begin_inset Index idx
33254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33257 هذا مدخل مجسم إيطالي
33264 You can also format the page number using the character
33265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33272 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33273 -command without a backslash.
33274 We can write for example
33277 \begin_layout Standard
33281 italic page number:|textit
33284 \begin_layout Standard
33287 to get the page number in italic.
33290 \begin_inset Index idx
33293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 مدخل مجسم ! ترقيم صفحة إيطالي :|textit
33301 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33302 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33320 \begin_inset space ~
33326 Have a look at section
33327 \begin_inset space ~
33331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33333 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33337 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33344 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33353 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33357 to generate the index, see section
33358 \begin_inset space ~
33362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33364 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33373 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33378 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33379 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33382 key "latexcompanion"
33395 \begin_layout Standard
33398 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33400 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33401 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33402 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33403 If so, put the following in the preamble
33406 \begin_layout Standard
33418 \begin_layout Standard
33424 \begin_layout Standard
33431 \begin_layout Standard
33437 \begin_inset Index idx
33440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33443 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33450 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33451 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33452 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33455 \begin_layout Standard
33458 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33459 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33460 a bold font for all index entries.
33461 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33473 documentation for details,
33474 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33476 key "makeindex,xindy"
33484 \begin_layout Subsection
33486 \begin_inset Index idx
33489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33498 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33505 \begin_layout Standard
33508 If the index generation program
33512 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33513 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33517 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33518 distribution, is used.
33522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33528 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33529 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33530 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33531 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33532 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33542 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33544 dialog, see section
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33551 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33556 The available options are listed and explained in
33557 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33559 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33565 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33569 \begin_layout Standard
33572 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33573 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33577 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33581 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33582 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33585 \begin_layout Subsection
33589 \begin_layout Standard
33592 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33593 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33601 next to the standard index.
33603 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33604 that add this feature.
33613 \begin_inset Index idx
33616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33617 حزمة لتيك ! splitidx
33624 package to generate multiple indexes.
33625 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33633 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33635 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33643 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33644 style, but it also includes
33645 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33646 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33654 \begin_layout Standard
33657 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33658 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33661 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33664 and select the option
33666 Use multiple Indexes
33673 already contains the standard index
33674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33682 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33683 also appear as a heading) to the
33687 input field and press the
33692 The new index now also appears in the list.
33693 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33694 label color to the new index.
33697 \begin_layout Standard
33700 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33710 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33711 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33712 are additional features:
33715 \begin_layout Itemize
33718 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33719 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33722 \begin_layout Itemize
33725 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33726 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33731 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33732 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33733 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33734 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33737 \begin_layout Itemize
33744 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33745 code in the name of the index.
33748 \begin_layout Section
33749 المصطلحات/قاموس الكلمات
33750 \begin_inset Index idx
33753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33760 \begin_inset Index idx
33763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33794 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33801 \begin_layout Standard
33804 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33805 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33806 called nomenclature or glossary.
33809 \begin_layout Standard
33812 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33820 \begin_inset Index idx
33823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33824 حزمة لتيك ! nomencl
33832 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33834 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33841 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33845 \begin_layout Standard
33848 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33849 and then use the menu
33851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33857 \begin_inset space ~
33862 or the toolbar button
33867 arg "nomencl-insert"
33874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33885 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33888 \begin_layout Standard
33891 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33892 The first is the term or
33896 that you wish to define.
33901 of the term or symbol.
33904 \begin_layout Standard
33907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33916 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33917 code for nomenclature entries the option
33921 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33929 \begin_layout Subsection
33931 \begin_inset Index idx
33934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33943 \begin_layout Standard
33946 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33950 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33957 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33965 \begin_inset Newline newline
33973 \begin_inset Newline newline
33979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33986 character starts/ends the formula.
33987 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33988 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34000 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34010 \begin_layout Standard
34013 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34014 syntax is given in section
34015 \begin_inset space ~
34019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34021 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34028 \begin_layout Standard
34034 \begin_inset space ~
34039 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34041 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34046 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34053 in this document is:
34054 \begin_inset Newline newline
34059 dummy entry for the character
34064 \begin_inset Newline newline
34076 \begin_inset space ~
34086 font use the command
34115 \begin_layout Standard
34118 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34123 \begin_inset space \space{}
34127 \begin_inset Newline newline
34143 \begin_inset Newline newline
34146 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34147 This command will make the font of all symbols
34154 \begin_inset space ~
34162 \begin_layout Standard
34165 If the characters |
34166 \begin_inset space \space{}
34170 \begin_inset space \space{}
34174 \begin_inset space \space{}
34178 \begin_inset space \space{}
34182 \begin_inset space \space{}
34185 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34186 code they need to be escaped
34187 by adding a quote character in front of them.
34188 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34189 LatexCommand nomenclature
34190 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34191 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34199 \begin_layout Subsection
34200 فرز وترتيب المصطلحات
34201 \begin_inset Index idx
34204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34213 \begin_layout Standard
34216 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34217 -code of the symbol
34219 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34221 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34224 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34225 LatexCommand nomenclature
34227 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34235 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34239 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34240 LatexCommand nomenclature
34243 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34249 They will be sorted by
34250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34276 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34279 will be sorted before the
34283 since the character
34284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34291 is considered in sorting.
34294 \begin_layout Standard
34297 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34300 \begin_inset space ~
34305 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34306 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34308 For the example given, you can insert
34312 in this field for the
34313 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34320 will be located before
34321 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34327 \begin_layout Standard
34330 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34335 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34345 \begin_layout Subsection
34347 \begin_inset Index idx
34350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34359 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34373 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34374 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34377 \begin_layout Description
34380 refeq Appends the phrase
34381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34396 to every nomenclature entry, where
34402 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34405 \begin_layout Description
34408 refpage Appends the phrase
34409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34424 to every nomenclature entry, where
34430 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34433 \begin_layout Description
34436 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34439 \begin_layout Standard
34442 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34443 class options list in the
34445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34449 In this document the options
34456 \begin_layout Standard
34457 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34463 \begin_layout Standard
34466 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34467 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34472 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34475 \begin_layout Description
34487 \begin_layout Description
34492 nomrefpage Like the
34499 \begin_layout Description
34504 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34513 \begin_layout Description
34519 \begin_inset space ~
34525 \begin_inset space ~
34530 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34533 \begin_layout Standard
34537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34544 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34545 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34549 \begin_layout Standard
34559 \begin_inset Newline newline
34565 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34583 unskip, see equation
34586 \begin_inset Newline newline
34593 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34594 \begin_inset Newline newline
34600 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34606 \begin_inset space ~
34623 \begin_layout Standard
34626 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34629 \begin_inset space ~
34634 in the document settings under
34637 \begin_inset space ~
34645 \begin_layout Standard
34654 \begin_inset Newline newline
34658 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34664 \begin_inset space ~
34676 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34678 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34679 \begin_inset Newline newline
34686 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34687 \begin_inset Newline newline
34691 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34697 \begin_inset space ~
34709 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34714 \begin_layout Subsection
34716 \begin_inset Index idx
34719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34728 \begin_layout Standard
34731 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34734 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
34739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34750 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34751 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34752 You can choose between these settings:
34755 \begin_layout Description
34758 Default a space of 1
34759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34765 \begin_layout Description
34769 \begin_inset space ~
34773 \begin_inset space ~
34776 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34779 \begin_layout Description
34782 Custom custom space
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34788 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34797 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34805 For example, in order to change the name to
34809 , add the following line to the preamble:
34812 \begin_layout Standard
34826 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34829 \begin_layout Standard
34832 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34833 \begin_inset Newline newline
34848 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34851 \begin_layout Subsection
34853 \begin_inset Index idx
34856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34865 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34872 \begin_layout Standard
34880 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34881 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34883 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34888 by adding options, see section
34889 \begin_inset space ~
34893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34895 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34900 The available options are listed and explained in
34901 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34903 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34911 \begin_layout Section
34913 \begin_inset Index idx
34916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34923 \begin_inset Index idx
34926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34935 name "sec:Branches"
34942 \begin_layout Standard
34945 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34946 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34947 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34948 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34951 \begin_layout Standard
34954 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34955 allows you to put text into branches.
34956 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34957 To create a branch, either select the menu
34959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34960 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34963 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34965 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34972 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34973 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34974 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34975 and whether the name of the branch should
34976 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34977 (see below for an example).
34978 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34979 to the name of the other) and to add
34980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34992 \begin_inset space ~
34995 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34996 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34999 \begin_layout Standard
35002 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35003 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35008 where you can choose a branch.
35009 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35013 \begin_layout Standard
35016 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35017 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35020 \begin_layout Standard
35023 \begin_inset Branch Question
35027 \begin_layout Standard
35033 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35041 \begin_layout Standard
35044 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35048 \begin_layout Standard
35054 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35062 \begin_layout Standard
35071 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35072 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35075 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35076 Consider for example a file
35077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35084 which has the above branches.
35086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35093 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35117 branch were inactive,
35118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35133 branch was active, likewise
35134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35149 branch was active, and
35150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35153 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35157 if both branches were active.
35158 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35159 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35165 \begin_layout Standard
35168 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
35174 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35175 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35179 \begin_inset space ~
35187 \begin_layout Standard
35190 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35194 \begin_layout Standard
35201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35208 branch is deactivated.
35214 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35220 \begin_layout Standard
35223 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35224 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35225 definitions for each branch.
35226 For example you can define for the question branch
35230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35233 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35234 -syntax, see section
35235 \begin_inset space ~
35239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35241 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35253 \begin_layout Standard
35264 \begin_layout Standard
35275 \begin_layout Standard
35278 and for the answer branch
35281 \begin_layout Standard
35292 \begin_layout Standard
35303 \begin_layout Standard
35306 \begin_inset Branch Question
35310 \begin_layout Standard
35316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35344 \begin_layout Standard
35347 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35351 \begin_layout Standard
35357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35388 Now it is possible to use the
35392 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35399 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35402 commands to obtain conditional output.
35403 Here is an example formula where only the
35412 \begin_inset Formula
35414 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35422 \begin_layout Standard
35425 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35433 \begin_layout Standard
35436 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35438 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35442 \begin_inset space \space{}
35445 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35447 For this advanced usage, see the
35453 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35458 \begin_layout Section
35460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35462 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35467 \begin_inset Index idx
35470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35479 \begin_layout Standard
35484 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35485 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35488 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35490 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35498 \begin_inset Index idx
35501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35502 حزمة لتيك ! hyperref
35509 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35510 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35511 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35512 part of the document.
35516 \begin_layout Standard
35519 The header information in the dialog tab
35523 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35524 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35525 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35526 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35530 \begin_inset space ~
35534 \begin_inset space ~
35539 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35540 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35541 and author entries.
35545 \begin_inset space ~
35549 \begin_inset space ~
35553 \begin_inset space ~
35558 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35561 \begin_layout Standard
35564 You can specify in the dialog tab
35568 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35573 \begin_inset space ~
35577 \begin_inset space ~
35581 \begin_inset space ~
35586 option allows long links to be split;
35589 \begin_inset space ~
35593 \begin_inset space ~
35597 \begin_inset space ~
35605 \begin_inset space ~
35610 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35613 \begin_inset space ~
35618 colors the different links.
35619 The default colors are:
35622 \begin_layout Labeling
35623 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35629 for hyperlinks and URLs
35632 \begin_layout Labeling
35633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35642 \begin_layout Labeling
35643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35652 \begin_layout Standard
35655 but you can change these in the field
35660 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35663 \begin_layout Standard
35667 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35670 \begin_layout Standard
35677 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35678 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35679 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35682 \begin_layout Standard
35689 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35690 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35691 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35701 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35702 when opening the PDF.
35704 \begin_inset space ~
35707 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35708 \begin_inset space ~
35711 1 will only display the sections.
35714 \begin_layout Standard
35717 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35718 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35724 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35725 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35735 \begin_layout Section
35736 كود تيك وتراكيب لتيك
35737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35739 name "sec:TeX-Code-1"
35746 \begin_layout Subsection
35748 \begin_inset Index idx
35751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35760 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35767 \begin_layout Standard
35770 As \SpecialChar LyX
35771 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35772 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35773 commands and constructs,
35776 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35777 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35778 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35779 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35780 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35781 cannot support all packages and
35785 \begin_layout Standard
35788 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35789 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35790 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35794 Code box is created by the menu
35796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35798 \begin_inset space ~
35803 or by the toolbar button
35824 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35832 \begin_layout Standard
35835 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35837 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35839 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35846 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35851 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35858 , you can write the command part
35864 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35865 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35869 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35870 Code box behind the word.
35871 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35872 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35876 \begin_layout Standard
35877 \begin_inset Graphics
35878 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
35886 \begin_layout Standard
35892 \begin_layout Standard
35895 This is a line with a
35899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35922 \begin_layout Standard
35925 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35934 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35935 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35936 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35937 know that the command is finished.
35945 \begin_layout Subsection
35946 مدخل قصير لتراكيب لتيك
35947 \begin_inset Argument 1
35950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35957 \begin_inset Index idx
35960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35967 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35969 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35976 \begin_layout Standard
35979 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35980 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35981 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35982 uses in the background.
35983 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35984 is based on commands, you can
35985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35993 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35994 any time if you know the right commands.
35995 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35996 is the end of the day.
35997 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35998 all caption labels bold.
35999 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
36001 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
36005 \begin_layout Standard
36008 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
36010 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36012 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36015 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36025 \begin_layout Standard
36028 As result you find that the package
36035 \begin_inset Index idx
36038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36039 حزمة لتيك ! caption
36047 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
36049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36052 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36056 \begin_inset space ~
36064 \begin_layout Standard
36070 usepackage[options]{package name}
36073 \begin_layout Standard
36076 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
36077 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
36078 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36079 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36082 \begin_layout Standard
36085 In your case the package name is
36090 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
36095 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36096 So you add the command
36099 \begin_layout Standard
36105 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36108 \begin_layout Standard
36111 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36118 For more commands provided by the
36122 package, have a look at its documentation,
36123 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36138 \begin_layout Standard
36141 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
36143 For example if you use a
36147 class, you don't need the package
36151 , you can instead write
36154 \begin_layout Standard
36160 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36165 \begin_layout Standard
36168 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36169 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
36170 documentation of the document class you want to use.
36177 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36183 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
36184 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
36186 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36187 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
36188 Code box as described in the previous
36192 \begin_layout Standard
36195 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36196 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36199 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36201 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36209 \begin_layout Standard
36212 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36218 \begin_layout Standard
36222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36234 \begin_inset Note Note
36237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36240 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36248 \begin_layout Left Header
36249 \begin_inset Argument 1
36252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36274 \begin_inset Note Note
36277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36280 defines the header line as described below
36288 \begin_layout Center Header
36289 \begin_inset Argument 1
36292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36301 \begin_layout Right Header
36302 \begin_inset Argument 1
36305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36328 \begin_layout Left Footer
36329 \begin_inset Argument 1
36332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36355 \begin_layout Center Footer
36356 \begin_inset Argument 1
36359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36374 \begin_inset Newline newline
36380 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36386 \begin_layout Right Footer
36387 \begin_inset Argument 1
36390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36412 \begin_layout Section
36413 تخصيص رأس وتذييل الصفحات
36414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36416 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36421 \begin_inset Index idx
36424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36425 مستند ! سطر رأس/تذييل
36431 \begin_inset Index idx
36434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36443 \begin_layout Standard
36446 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36450 \begin_inset space ~
36461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36473 As a second step add in the menu
36475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36476 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36485 Custom Header/Footerlines
36488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36492 This module offers the following 6
36493 \begin_inset space ~
36499 \begin_layout Description
36503 \begin_inset space ~
36507 \begin_inset space ~
36511 \begin_inset space ~
36515 \begin_inset space ~
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36525 \begin_layout Description
36529 \begin_inset space ~
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36537 \begin_inset space ~
36541 \begin_inset space ~
36545 \begin_inset space ~
36551 \begin_layout Standard
36554 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36555 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36558 \begin_layout Standard
36561 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36562 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36564 \begin_inset space ~
36568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36570 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36574 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36577 \begin_layout Standard
36580 \begin_inset Float figure
36586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36591 \begin_inset Tabular
36592 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36593 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36594 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36596 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36598 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36620 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36639 \begin_inset space ~
36647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36653 \begin_inset space ~
36661 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36667 \begin_inset space ~
36677 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36683 The normal text on the page goes here.
36684 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36686 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36687 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36692 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36701 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36712 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36718 \begin_inset space ~
36726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36732 \begin_inset space ~
36740 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36746 \begin_inset space ~
36756 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36778 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36800 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36805 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36807 name "fig:Page-layout"
36811 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36824 \begin_layout Standard
36827 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36836 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36845 is set to “Default”.
36846 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36855 \begin_layout Subsection
36859 \begin_layout Standard
36862 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36863 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36864 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36865 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36867 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36869 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36872 \begin_layout Standard
36875 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36876 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36882 \begin_inset space ~
36890 \begin_layout Description
36895 thepage prints the current page number
36898 \begin_layout Description
36903 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36906 \begin_layout Description
36911 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36914 \begin_layout Description
36919 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36920 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36927 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36930 because it usually goes in a left header.
36933 \begin_layout Description
36938 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36939 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36941 It is normally used in the right header.
36944 \begin_layout Subsection
36945 الرأس/التذييل الافتراضي
36948 \begin_layout Standard
36951 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36952 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36953 footer has the page number.
36954 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36955 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36956 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36959 \begin_inset space ~
36967 \begin_layout Subsection
36971 \begin_layout Standard
36974 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36975 Some pages are different.
36976 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36977 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36978 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36979 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36980 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36984 خط الزخرفة في الرأس والتذييل
36987 \begin_layout Standard
36990 By default, you get a 0.4
36991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36994 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36995 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37007 in the following way:
37010 \begin_layout Standard
37018 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37021 \begin_layout Standard
37024 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37037 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
37038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37044 \begin_layout Standard
37047 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37049 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
37050 \begin_inset space ~
37054 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37065 عدة أسطر في الرأس والتذييل
37068 \begin_layout Standard
37071 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
37072 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37073 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
37075 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37091 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37101 \begin_layout Standard
37109 headheight}{height}
37112 \begin_layout Standard
37119 is a size in standard units (e.
37120 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37124 \begin_inset space \space{}
37132 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
37133 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
37134 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37135 logfile with the menu
37137 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37139 \begin_inset space ~
37147 \begin_inset space ~
37152 to see if you can find a warning about the package
37159 \begin_inset Index idx
37162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37163 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
37171 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
37172 for your header/footer.
37175 \begin_layout Subsection
37179 \begin_layout Standard
37182 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
37183 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
37184 This example consists of the following definition:
37187 \begin_layout Description
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37200 , empty optional argument
37203 \begin_layout Description
37207 \begin_inset space ~
37210 Header empty, empty optional argument
37213 \begin_layout Description
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37226 in the optional argument
37229 \begin_layout Description
37233 \begin_inset space ~
37242 in the optional argument
37245 \begin_layout Description
37249 \begin_inset space ~
37262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37266 \begin_inset Newline newline
37270 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37277 in the optional argument
37280 \begin_layout Description
37284 \begin_inset space ~
37293 , empty optional argument
37296 \begin_layout Description
37301 headrulewidth set to 2
37302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37308 \begin_layout Standard
37311 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
37312 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
37318 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37328 \begin_layout Standard
37331 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37337 \begin_layout Standard
37343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37347 pagestyle{headings}
37353 \begin_inset Note Note
37356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37359 switches back to page style with the default headings
37367 \begin_layout Section
37368 استعراض مقتطفات من مستندك
37369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37371 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37376 \begin_inset Index idx
37379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37386 \begin_inset Index idx
37389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37398 \begin_layout Standard
37402 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
37403 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
37404 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37407 \begin_layout Subsection
37411 \begin_layout Standard
37414 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37422 \begin_inset Index idx
37425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37426 حزمة لتيك ! preview-latex
37433 (on some systems named simply
37438 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37447 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37449 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37457 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37458 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37459 -package are automatically
37460 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37464 \begin_layout Subsection
37468 \begin_layout Standard
37471 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37472 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37474 activate the option
37477 \begin_inset space ~
37484 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37490 \begin_inset space ~
37494 \begin_inset space ~
37497 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37504 \begin_inset space ~
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37522 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37525 \begin_layout Standard
37528 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37533 \begin_inset space ~
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37549 \begin_layout Standard
37552 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37553 and when you finish
37557 \begin_layout Standard
37560 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37569 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37570 generated by activating the option
37573 \begin_inset space ~
37579 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37587 \begin_layout Subsection
37588 تحديد أجزاء المستند
37591 \begin_layout Standard
37594 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37595 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37596 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37597 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37599 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37605 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37606 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37607 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37610 \begin_layout Standard
37613 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37620 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37633 is explained in section
37635 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37650 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37651 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37652 the final rotated boxes,
37653 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37654 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37656 Here is the result:
37659 \begin_layout Standard
37662 \begin_inset Preview
37664 \begin_layout Standard
37671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37675 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37681 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37691 height_special "totalheight"
37696 backgroundcolor "none"
37699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37726 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37732 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37754 \begin_layout Standard
37757 Previewing works also for colors.
37758 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37778 is explained in section
37785 \begin_inset space ~
37798 \begin_layout Standard
37801 \begin_inset Preview
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37828 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37833 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37852 \begin_layout Standard
37855 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37861 \begin_layout Standard
37864 If \SpecialChar LyX
37865 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37866 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37867 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37868 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37869 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37870 the \SpecialChar TeX
37872 If \SpecialChar LyX
37873 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37874 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37876 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37877 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37878 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37881 \begin_layout Subsection
37882 كود \SpecialChar LaTeX
37886 \begin_layout Standard
37889 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37890 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37893 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37900 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37902 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37904 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37905 's main window, then only this selection
37906 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37907 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37908 the source view window.
37913 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37914 ; but note that if you have
37915 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37917 not just the one which is open at the time.
37920 \begin_layout Section
37921 البحث والاستبدال المتقدم
37922 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37924 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37929 \begin_inset Index idx
37932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37939 \begin_inset Index idx
37942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37951 \begin_layout Subsection
37955 \begin_layout Standard
37958 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37959 allows for searching of complex,
37960 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37962 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37963 The key-features are:
37966 \begin_layout Itemize
37969 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37970 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37971 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37975 \begin_layout Itemize
37978 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37979 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37980 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37981 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37984 \begin_layout Itemize
37987 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37988 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37989 outside of mathematics environments
37992 \begin_layout Itemize
37995 Search may be widened to a specific
38000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38004 \begin_inset space ~
38007 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38008 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
38015 \begin_layout Itemize
38018 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
38019 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38024 \begin_inset space ~
38027 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38030 \begin_layout Subsection
38034 \begin_layout Standard
38037 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38039 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38054 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38059 ) or the toolbar button
38064 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38072 Advanced Find and Replace
38077 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38081 \begin_layout Standard
38089 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
38093 \begin_inset space ~
38098 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38103 arg "paragraph-break"
38109 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
38110 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38116 arg "paragraph-break"
38121 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38125 searches backwards.
38128 \begin_layout Standard
38134 \begin_inset space ~
38139 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38148 \begin_inset space ~
38153 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38160 \begin_layout Standard
38163 Mathematical formulas, such as
38164 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38167 or something more complex like
38168 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38171 , may be searched for by typing them in the
38176 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
38177 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38178 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38179 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38189 \begin_layout Standard
38192 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38193 This is done by switching to the
38197 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38202 This way, entering in the
38209 \begin_layout Itemize
38212 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
38213 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
38216 \begin_layout Itemize
38219 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
38220 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
38223 \begin_layout Itemize
38226 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
38227 of it only within section headings.
38228 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
38229 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
38233 \begin_layout Itemize
38236 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
38237 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
38240 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38244 \begin_layout Standard
38247 The entries made in the
38251 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
38254 \begin_inset space ~
38260 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
38264 button or alternatively press
38269 arg "paragraph-break"
38278 while the cursor is in the
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_layout Standard
38292 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
38294 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
38298 \begin_layout Itemize
38301 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
38302 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
38303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38310 with its typewriter version
38311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38325 \begin_layout Itemize
38328 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
38330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38334 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38346 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38353 (you may want to enable the
38356 \begin_inset space ~
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38369 options and disable the
38377 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
38378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38385 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
38386 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38390 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38393 , or occurrences of
38394 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38398 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38404 \begin_layout Subsection
38408 \begin_layout Standard
38411 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38418 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38420 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38422 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38432 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
38438 This is done with the context menu
38440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38441 Insert Regular Expression
38443 while the cursor is in the
38448 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
38449 expression matching rules
38453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38456 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38463 \begin_inset space ~
38466 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38467 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
38473 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
38474 same text in the document.
38475 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38476 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38479 \begin_layout Enumerate
38482 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
38487 editor the fraction
38488 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38492 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38495 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
38496 fractions with the given denominator.
38499 \begin_layout Enumerate
38502 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
38514 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38519 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
38520 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38521 Also, by inserting a
38522 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38525 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38526 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38529 \begin_layout Standard
38532 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
38533 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
38534 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38537 , and referring back to them through
38538 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38542 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
38546 For example, try searching with the regexp
38547 \begin_inset Newline newline
38550 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
38553 \begin_inset Newline newline
38556 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
38559 \begin_layout Standard
38562 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
38565 \begin_layout Standard
38568 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38577 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
38578 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
38579 sub-expressions is absolute.
38581 \begin_inset space ~
38585 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38588 always refers to the first occurrence of
38589 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38592 in all entered regexps.
38600 \begin_layout Section
38602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38604 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38609 \begin_inset Index idx
38612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38621 \begin_layout Standard
38625 has a built-in spell checker.
38628 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38635 key or the toolbar button
38640 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38645 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38646 beginning of the currently selected text.
38647 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38648 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38649 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38650 scrolled so that it is visible.
38651 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38652 n, if any could be found.
38653 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38657 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38658 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38661 \begin_layout Standard
38664 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38671 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38672 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38674 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38675 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38688 arg "dialog-show character"
38693 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38695 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38698 \begin_layout Standard
38701 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38702 can be downloaded from here:
38703 \begin_inset Newline newline
38707 \begin_inset Flex URL
38710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38712 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38718 \begin_inset Newline newline
38722 \begin_inset space ~
38725 files for each language.
38726 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38730 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38731 's installation subfolder
38739 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38741 \begin_inset Newline newline
38744 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38745 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38746 but in most cases these are
38762 is the language code.
38765 \begin_layout Subsection
38766 المزيد من الإعدادات
38769 \begin_layout Standard
38774 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38775 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38780 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38783 you can set the following things:
38786 \begin_layout Description
38790 \begin_inset space ~
38793 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38794 should use for spell checking.
38795 Depending on your platform,
38805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38808 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38809 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38824 \begin_inset space ~
38827 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38830 \begin_layout Description
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38837 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38838 will always use the given language
38839 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38842 \begin_layout Description
38846 \begin_inset space ~
38849 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38855 \begin_inset space \space{}
38859 This should normally not be needed.
38862 \begin_layout Description
38866 \begin_inset space ~
38870 \begin_inset space ~
38873 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38885 \begin_layout Description
38889 \begin_inset space ~
38892 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38893 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38894 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38895 appear in a context menu.
38896 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38900 \begin_layout Description
38904 \begin_inset space ~
38908 \begin_inset space ~
38912 \begin_inset space ~
38915 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38919 \begin_layout Section
38921 \begin_inset Index idx
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38933 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38940 \begin_layout Standard
38944 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38945 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38957 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38959 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38969 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38971 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38972 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38973 which are available for many languages.
38976 \begin_layout Standard
38979 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38980 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38984 \begin_layout Subsection
38988 \begin_layout Standard
38999 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
39003 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
39008 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
39010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39014 \begin_inset space ~
39022 For instance, the US English files are named:
39025 \begin_layout Itemize
39031 \begin_layout Itemize
39037 \begin_layout Standard
39048 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
39049 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
39052 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39053 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39054 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39061 ) to the path where they are installed.
39065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39068 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
39069 ies, typical locations are
39075 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
39079 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
39083 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39086 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
39092 LibreOffice-<Version>
39099 On the Mac, the default location is
39101 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39102 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39103 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39104 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39105 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39106 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39114 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
39115 during the \SpecialChar LyX
39116 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
39120 \begin_layout Standard
39123 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39124 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
39126 \begin_inset Newline newline
39130 \begin_inset Flex URL
39133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39135 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
39143 \begin_layout Standard
39146 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
39147 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
39149 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39150 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39151 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39153 \begin_inset space ~
39158 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39160 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
39161 and point \SpecialChar LyX
39165 \begin_layout Standard
39168 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
39170 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39173 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
39179 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
39182 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
39183 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
39185 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39192 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39193 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39195 \begin_inset space ~
39200 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
39203 \begin_layout Subsection
39207 \begin_layout Standard
39210 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
39212 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39215 or the toolbar button
39220 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39225 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
39227 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
39229 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
39230 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
39231 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
39240 ), related terms (such as
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39252 ), compounds (such as
39255 \begin_inset space ~
39264 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
39273 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
39276 \begin_layout Standard
39279 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
39280 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
39284 \begin_layout Standard
39287 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
39288 the dictionary, such as the above
39292 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
39293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39297 \begin_inset space \space{}
39300 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
39301 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
39302 For example, looking up the word form
39306 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
39311 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
39312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39316 \begin_inset space \space{}
39327 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
39328 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
39329 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
39332 \begin_layout Section
39334 \begin_inset Index idx
39337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39344 \begin_inset Index idx
39347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39348 مستند ! سجل التعديلات
39354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39356 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
39363 \begin_layout Standard
39366 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
39367 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
39368 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
39369 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
39371 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39376 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39378 \begin_inset space ~
39386 \begin_layout Standard
39389 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39403 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39404 You can change the color in
39406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39407 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39409 \begin_inset space ~
39413 \begin_inset space ~
39418 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39425 \begin_inset Index idx
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39429 لون ! سجل التعديلات
39436 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39437 's status bar when the
39438 cursor is in changed text.
39439 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39444 arg "changes-merge"
39450 \begin_layout Standard
39453 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39457 \begin_inset Index idx
39460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39461 شريط أدوات ! مراجعة
39469 \begin_layout Standard
39470 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39476 \begin_layout Standard
39477 \begin_inset Graphics
39478 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39486 \begin_layout Standard
39487 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39493 \begin_layout Standard
39496 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39499 \begin_layout Standard
39502 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39508 \begin_layout Standard
39509 \begin_inset Tabular
39510 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39511 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39512 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39513 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 arg "changes-track"
39531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39538 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39540 \begin_inset space ~
39543 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39545 \begin_inset space ~
39554 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39563 arg "changes-output"
39571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39580 \begin_inset space ~
39583 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39585 \begin_inset space ~
39589 \begin_inset space ~
39593 \begin_inset space ~
39602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 Jumps to the next change
39631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39640 arg "change-accept"
39648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39655 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39657 \begin_inset space ~
39660 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39662 \begin_inset space ~
39671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39680 arg "change-reject"
39688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39697 \begin_inset space ~
39700 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39702 \begin_inset space ~
39711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39720 arg "changes-merge"
39728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39740 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39742 \begin_inset space ~
39751 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39760 arg "all-changes-accept"
39768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39777 \begin_inset space ~
39780 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39782 \begin_inset space ~
39786 \begin_inset space ~
39795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39804 arg "all-changes-reject"
39812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39824 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39826 \begin_inset space ~
39830 \begin_inset space ~
39839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39864 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39866 \begin_inset space ~
39875 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39899 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39901 \begin_inset space ~
39917 \begin_layout Standard
39920 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39926 \begin_layout Standard
39929 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39949 \begin_layout Standard
39952 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39953 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39954 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39955 the next change after the current cursor position.
39956 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39957 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39958 step to the next change.
39959 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39962 \begin_layout Standard
39965 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39966 to describe a change.
39969 \begin_layout Standard
39972 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39980 \begin_inset Index idx
39983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39984 حزمة لتيك ! dvipost
39992 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39994 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40001 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40005 \begin_layout Section
40007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40009 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40014 \begin_inset Index idx
40017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40026 \begin_layout Standard
40029 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
40032 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40036 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
40037 file with change tracking enabled showing the
40039 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
40041 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
40045 \begin_inset space ~
40049 \begin_inset space ~
40053 \begin_inset space ~
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40066 \begin_inset space ~
40070 \begin_inset space ~
40074 \begin_inset space ~
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40082 \begin_inset space ~
40087 enables the change tracking option
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40094 \begin_inset space ~
40098 \begin_inset space ~
40103 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
40106 \begin_layout Section
40108 \begin_inset Index idx
40111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40120 \begin_layout Standard
40123 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
40124 with any language you want.
40125 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
40126 up \SpecialChar LyX
40128 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40130 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40138 \begin_layout Standard
40141 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
40142 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40149 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40156 \begin_layout Subsection
40158 \begin_inset Index idx
40161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40168 \begin_inset Index idx
40171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40178 \begin_inset Index idx
40181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40190 \begin_layout Standard
40195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40199 dialog lets you set
40201 the language, the quote style and character encoding
40206 \begin_layout Standard
40213 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40223 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
40224 For details about the different encoding options see section
40225 \begin_inset space ~
40229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40231 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
40238 \begin_layout Subsection
40239 ضبط خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
40240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40242 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
40249 \begin_layout Standard
40252 If you have for example a U.
40253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40256 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
40257 can use an alternate keymap.
40258 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
40263 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40264 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40265 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
40268 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
40269 \begin_inset space ~
40273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40275 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
40280 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
40281 which one you want to use.
40284 \begin_layout Standard
40287 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
40288 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
40289 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
40290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40293 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
40294 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
40295 one to support the characters you want.
40296 This and many other customizations are explained in the
40303 \begin_layout Chapter
40306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40308 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
40315 \begin_layout Standard
40318 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
40319 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
40320 topic inside the user's guide.
40323 \begin_layout Section
40325 \begin_inset Index idx
40328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40337 \begin_layout Standard
40344 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
40347 \begin_layout Subsection
40351 \begin_layout Standard
40354 Creates a new document.
40357 \begin_layout Subsection
40361 \begin_layout Standard
40364 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
40365 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
40366 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
40369 \begin_layout Subsection
40373 \begin_layout Standard
40379 \begin_layout Subsection
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40386 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
40387 Click there on a file to open it.
40390 \begin_layout Subsection
40394 \begin_layout Standard
40397 Closes the current document.
40400 \begin_layout Subsection
40404 \begin_layout Standard
40407 Closes all opened documents.
40410 \begin_layout Subsection
40414 \begin_layout Standard
40417 Saves the actual document.
40420 \begin_layout Subsection
40424 \begin_layout Standard
40427 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
40430 \begin_layout Subsection
40434 \begin_layout Standard
40437 Saves all opened documents.
40440 \begin_layout Subsection
40444 \begin_layout Standard
40447 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40450 \begin_layout Subsection
40454 \begin_layout Standard
40457 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
40458 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40459 It is described in the section
40461 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40466 Additional Features
40471 \begin_layout Subsection
40475 \begin_layout Standard
40478 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40479 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
40481 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
40482 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40486 \begin_layout Standard
40489 When using the menu entry
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40497 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40509 \begin_inset space ~
40514 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40515 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40518 \begin_layout Subsection
40520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40522 name "subsec:Export"
40529 \begin_layout Standard
40532 You can export your document to various file formats.
40533 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40535 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40536 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40537 during its configuration.
40540 \begin_layout Standard
40543 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
40545 \begin_inset space ~
40549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40551 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40558 \begin_layout Description
40565 \begin_inset space ~
40568 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40573 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40574 \begin_inset Newline newline
40577 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40578 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40582 \begin_layout Description
40585 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
40591 \begin_layout Description
40595 \begin_inset space ~
40598 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
40604 \begin_layout Description
40607 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
40608 's native DVI-format.
40609 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
40610 files paths or file names in your document.
40612 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
40619 \begin_layout Description
40622 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
40623 in files paths or file names
40626 \begin_layout Description
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40637 ) DVI-format using the program
40639 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40642 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
40646 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40655 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40663 \begin_layout Description
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40670 (cropped) the same as
40674 but with cropped page margins.
40677 \begin_layout Description
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40684 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40688 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40693 \begin_layout Description
40699 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40708 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40716 \begin_layout Description
40720 \begin_inset space ~
40724 \begin_inset space ~
40727 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40731 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40739 \begin_layout Description
40744 \begin_inset space ~
40753 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40754 source that is compilable with the program
40756 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40760 \begin_layout Description
40765 \begin_inset space ~
40770 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40771 source, additionally all images used in the document
40772 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40776 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40779 \begin_layout Description
40784 \begin_inset space ~
40789 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40790 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40791 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40799 \begin_layout Description
40804 \begin_inset space ~
40813 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40814 source that is compilable with the program
40820 \begin_layout Description
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40828 \begin_inset space ~
40835 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40836 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40842 \begin_layout Description
40846 \begin_inset space ~
40849 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40850 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40856 \begin_inset space \space{}
40861 \begin_inset space ~
40865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40880 represent the version number)
40883 \begin_layout Description
40887 \begin_inset space ~
40891 \begin_inset space ~
40894 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40895 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40896 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40900 \begin_layout Description
40903 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40904 's internal XHTML engine
40907 \begin_layout Description
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40926 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40931 For the conversion the program
40940 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40943 \begin_layout Description
40946 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40951 \begin_layout Description
40955 \begin_inset space ~
40958 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40960 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40963 For the conversion the program
40972 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40975 \begin_layout Description
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40982 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40983 For the conversion the program
40992 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40995 \begin_layout Description
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41002 (cropped) the same as
41005 \begin_inset space ~
41010 but with cropped page margins
41013 \begin_layout Description
41018 \begin_inset space ~
41023 PDF-format using the program
41027 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41030 \begin_layout Description
41035 \begin_inset space ~
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41047 \begin_inset space ~
41052 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
41053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41057 \begin_inset space \space{}
41060 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
41064 \begin_layout Description
41069 \begin_inset space ~
41074 PDF-format using the program
41076 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41079 , produces PDF-files directly
41082 \begin_layout Description
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41092 PDF-format using the program
41096 , produces PDF-files directly
41099 \begin_layout Description
41104 \begin_inset space ~
41109 PDF-format using the program
41113 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41116 \begin_layout Description
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41126 PDF-format using the program
41131 , produces PDF-files directly
41134 \begin_layout Description
41139 \begin_inset space ~
41147 \begin_layout Description
41152 \begin_inset space ~
41156 \begin_inset space ~
41161 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
41162 and then exported as text using the program
41167 \begin_layout Description
41173 PostScript format using the program
41181 options see section
41182 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41188 reference "subsec:General-output"
41195 \begin_layout Description
41198 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41199 source and also code in the statistical programming
41213 it is possible to use
41217 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41221 \begin_layout Standard
41224 If one of the menu entries
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41240 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41242 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41246 \begin_inset space ~
41250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41252 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41257 \begin_inset Index idx
41260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41269 \begin_layout Subsection
41273 \begin_layout Standard
41276 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
41277 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
41280 \begin_inset space ~
41284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41286 reference "sec:Paths"
41291 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
41300 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
41301 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
41302 's preferences as described in section
41303 \begin_inset space ~
41307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41309 reference "subsec:Converters"
41316 \begin_layout Subsection
41320 \begin_layout Standard
41323 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
41327 \begin_layout Subsection
41331 \begin_layout Standard
41334 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
41337 \begin_layout Section
41339 \begin_inset Index idx
41342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41351 \begin_layout Subsection
41355 \begin_layout Standard
41358 Described in section
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41365 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
41372 \begin_layout Subsection
41373 قص، نسخ، لصق، آخر لصق، لصق خاص
41376 \begin_layout Standard
41379 Described in section
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41386 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41393 \begin_layout Subsection
41397 \begin_layout Standard
41400 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
41401 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
41404 \begin_layout Subsection
41408 \begin_layout Standard
41411 Selects the whole document.
41414 \begin_layout Subsection
41415 بحث & استبدال (سريع)
41418 \begin_layout Standard
41421 Described in section
41422 \begin_inset space ~
41426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41428 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41435 \begin_layout Subsection
41436 بحث & استبدال (متقدم)
41439 \begin_layout Standard
41442 Described in section
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41449 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
41456 \begin_layout Subsection
41457 نقل الفقرة للأعلى/الأسفل
41460 \begin_layout Standard
41463 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
41467 \begin_layout Subsection
41471 \begin_layout Standard
41474 Described in section
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41481 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41488 \begin_layout Subsection
41490 \begin_inset Index idx
41493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41502 \begin_layout Standard
41505 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
41506 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
41510 \begin_layout Standard
41513 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
41514 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41521 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41531 \begin_layout Subsection
41532 الجدول و الصفوف & الأعمدة
41535 \begin_layout Standard
41538 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41539 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
41540 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
41543 \begin_layout Subsection
41547 \begin_layout Standard
41550 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
41551 It will dissolve this inset.
41552 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
41556 \begin_layout Subsection
41560 \begin_layout Standard
41563 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
41564 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
41567 \begin_layout Subsection
41568 زيادة/إنقاص عمق القائمة
41571 \begin_layout Standard
41574 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
41576 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
41577 \begin_inset space ~
41581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41583 reference "sec:Nesting"
41588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41590 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41597 \begin_layout Section
41599 \begin_inset Index idx
41602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41611 \begin_layout Standard
41614 At the bottom of the
41618 menu the opened documents are listed.
41621 \begin_layout Subsection
41622 فتح/إغلاق كل المدرجات
41625 \begin_layout Standard
41628 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41631 \begin_layout Subsection
41632 طي/عدم طي ماكرو الرياضيات
41635 \begin_layout Standard
41638 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41641 \begin_layout Standard
41644 Math macros are described in the
41651 \begin_layout Subsection
41655 \begin_layout Standard
41658 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41665 reference "sec:Navigating"
41670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41672 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41679 \begin_layout Subsection
41680 نافذة الكود المصدري
41683 \begin_layout Standard
41686 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41688 \begin_inset space ~
41692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41694 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41701 \begin_layout Subsection
41705 \begin_layout Standard
41708 Opens a window showing console messages.
41709 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41714 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41715 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41716 is processing the document.
41719 \begin_layout Subsection
41721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41723 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41728 \begin_inset Index idx
41731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41740 \begin_layout Standard
41743 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41745 All toolbars and the
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41753 can be turned on and off.
41758 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41770 \begin_inset space ~
41782 \begin_inset space ~
41787 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41791 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
41798 \begin_layout Standard
41805 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
41809 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41810 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41811 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41812 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41813 is inside a formula or table respectively.
41816 \begin_layout Standard
41820 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41821 \begin_inset space ~
41825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41827 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41834 \begin_layout Subsection
41838 \begin_layout Standard
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41851 \begin_inset space ~
41855 \begin_inset space ~
41859 \begin_inset space ~
41863 \begin_inset space ~
41868 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41869 's main window vertically while
41872 \begin_inset space ~
41876 \begin_inset space ~
41880 \begin_inset space ~
41884 \begin_inset space ~
41888 \begin_inset space ~
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41897 will split it horizontally.
41898 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41899 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41900 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41901 three or more documents at the same time.
41902 To close a split view, use the menu
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41917 \begin_layout Subsection
41921 \begin_layout Standard
41924 Closes a split view.
41927 \begin_layout Subsection
41931 \begin_layout Standard
41934 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41935 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41936 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41937 's main window fullscreen.
41938 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41939 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41942 \begin_layout Section
41944 \begin_inset Index idx
41947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41956 \begin_layout Subsection
41960 \begin_layout Standard
41963 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41964 \begin_inset space ~
41968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41970 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41981 \begin_layout Subsection
41983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41985 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41992 \begin_layout Standard
41995 Here you can insert the following characters:
41998 \begin_layout Description
42005 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
42008 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
42009 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42010 -packages you have installed.
42011 You can get a complete display by checking
42014 \begin_inset space ~
42020 \begin_inset Newline newline
42024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42033 Not all characters will be visible in the
42037 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
42038 dialog (see section
42039 \begin_inset space ~
42043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42045 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42049 ) can display every character.
42057 \begin_layout Description
42060 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
42064 \begin_layout Description
42068 \begin_inset space ~
42072 \begin_inset space ~
42075 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
42076 \begin_inset space ~
42080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42082 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42089 \begin_layout Description
42093 \begin_inset space ~
42096 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
42099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42100 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42106 \begin_layout Description
42110 \begin_inset space ~
42113 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42116 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42117 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42123 \begin_layout Description
42127 \begin_inset space ~
42130 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
42134 \begin_layout Description
42138 \begin_inset space ~
42141 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
42145 \begin_layout Description
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42152 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
42158 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42164 \begin_layout Description
42168 \begin_inset space ~
42171 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
42175 \begin_layout Description
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42185 \begin_inset Index idx
42188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42195 \begin_inset Index idx
42198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42206 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
42207 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
42209 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42217 \begin_inset Index idx
42220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42229 \begin_inset Newline newline
42232 More information about this feature can be found in the
42238 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42244 \begin_layout Description
42247 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
42249 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
42250 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
42254 \begin_layout Subsection
42258 \begin_layout Standard
42261 Opens a submenu with the following options:
42264 \begin_layout Description
42267 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
42268 \begin_inset script superscript
42270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42281 \begin_layout Description
42284 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
42285 \begin_inset script subscript
42287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42298 \begin_layout Description
42302 \begin_inset space ~
42305 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
42306 \begin_inset space ~
42310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42312 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
42319 \begin_layout Description
42323 \begin_inset space ~
42326 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
42327 \begin_inset space ~
42331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42333 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
42340 \begin_layout Description
42344 \begin_inset space ~
42347 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
42348 \begin_inset space ~
42352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42354 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
42361 \begin_layout Description
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42368 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42374 \begin_inset space \space{}
42377 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42378 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42387 To insert a fraction use the command
42392 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42396 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42405 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42412 \begin_layout Description
42416 \begin_inset space ~
42419 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42420 \begin_inset space ~
42424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42426 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42433 \begin_layout Description
42437 \begin_inset space ~
42440 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42441 \begin_inset space ~
42445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42447 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42454 \begin_layout Description
42458 \begin_inset space ~
42461 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42468 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42475 \begin_layout Description
42478 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42479 \begin_inset space ~
42483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42485 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42492 \begin_layout Description
42496 \begin_inset space ~
42499 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42500 \begin_inset space ~
42504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42506 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42513 \begin_layout Description
42517 \begin_inset space ~
42520 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42521 \begin_inset space ~
42525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42527 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
42534 \begin_layout Description
42538 \begin_inset space ~
42542 \begin_inset space ~
42545 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
42548 \begin_inset space ~
42552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42554 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
42561 for a usage example.
42564 \begin_layout Description
42568 \begin_inset space ~
42572 \begin_inset space ~
42575 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
42576 \begin_inset space ~
42580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42582 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42589 \begin_layout Description
42593 \begin_inset space ~
42596 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
42597 as described in section
42598 \begin_inset space ~
42602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42604 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42611 \begin_layout Description
42615 \begin_inset space ~
42618 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
42619 \begin_inset space ~
42623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42625 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42632 \begin_layout Description
42636 \begin_inset space ~
42639 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
42640 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
42642 \begin_inset space ~
42646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42648 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42655 \begin_layout Description
42659 \begin_inset space ~
42662 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42663 \begin_inset space ~
42667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42669 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42676 \begin_layout Description
42680 \begin_inset space ~
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42687 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42688 \begin_inset space ~
42692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42694 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42701 \begin_layout Subsection
42702 قائمة/جدول المحتويات
42705 \begin_layout Standard
42708 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42712 \begin_inset space ~
42733 are described in section
42734 \begin_inset space ~
42738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42740 reference "sec:toc"
42749 is described in section
42750 \begin_inset space ~
42754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42756 reference "sec:Index"
42764 is described in section
42765 \begin_inset space ~
42769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42771 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42777 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42780 is described in section
42781 \begin_inset space ~
42785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42787 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42794 \begin_layout Subsection
42798 \begin_layout Standard
42801 To insert floats, as described in section
42802 \begin_inset space ~
42806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42808 reference "sec:Floats"
42812 and in detail the chapter
42819 \begin_inset space ~
42827 \begin_layout Subsection
42831 \begin_layout Standard
42834 To insert notes, described in section
42835 \begin_inset space ~
42839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42841 reference "sec:Notes"
42848 \begin_layout Subsection
42852 \begin_layout Standard
42855 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42857 Branches are described in section
42858 \begin_inset space ~
42862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42864 reference "sec:Branches"
42871 \begin_layout Subsection
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42878 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42879 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42881 An example is the document class
42882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42889 with three custom insets.
42892 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42896 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42902 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42905 \begin_layout Subsection
42907 \begin_inset Index idx
42910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42919 \begin_layout Standard
42922 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42924 For more information see chapter
42926 External Document Parts
42929 \begin_inset space ~
42935 \begin_layout Subsection
42937 \begin_inset Index idx
42940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42949 \begin_layout Standard
42952 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42953 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42960 \begin_inset space ~
42968 \begin_layout Subsection
42972 \begin_layout Standard
42979 dialog as described in section
42980 \begin_inset space ~
42984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42986 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42993 \begin_layout Subsection
42997 \begin_layout Standard
43004 as described in section
43005 \begin_inset space ~
43009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43011 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43018 \begin_layout Subsection
43022 \begin_layout Standard
43029 as described in section
43030 \begin_inset space ~
43034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43036 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43043 \begin_layout Subsection
43045 \begin_inset Index idx
43048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43055 \begin_inset Index idx
43058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43059 جداول ! صفحات متعددة ! تعليق
43067 \begin_layout Standard
43070 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
43071 Floats are described in section
43072 \begin_inset space ~
43076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43078 reference "sec:Floats"
43082 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
43084 Multi-page Captions
43089 \begin_inset space ~
43097 \begin_layout Subsection
43101 \begin_layout Standard
43104 Inserts an index entry as described in section
43105 \begin_inset space ~
43109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43111 reference "sec:Index"
43118 \begin_layout Subsection
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43125 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
43126 \begin_inset space ~
43130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43132 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43139 \begin_layout Subsection
43143 \begin_layout Standard
43146 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
43147 Tables are described in section
43148 \begin_inset space ~
43152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43154 reference "sec:Tables"
43158 and in detail in the chapter
43165 \begin_inset space ~
43173 \begin_layout Subsection
43177 \begin_layout Standard
43185 Graphics are described in section
43186 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43192 reference "sec:Graphics"
43199 \begin_layout Subsection
43203 \begin_layout Standard
43206 Inserts a URL as described in section
43207 \begin_inset space ~
43211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43213 reference "subsec:URLs"
43220 \begin_layout Subsection
43224 \begin_layout Standard
43227 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
43228 \begin_inset space ~
43232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43234 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43241 \begin_layout Subsection
43245 \begin_layout Standard
43248 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43249 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43255 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43262 \begin_layout Subsection
43266 \begin_layout Standard
43269 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43270 \begin_inset space ~
43274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43276 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43283 \begin_layout Subsection
43284 فاصل <اسم> (أعلى/أسفل)
43287 \begin_layout Standard
43290 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
43291 environments of the same type.
43293 \begin_inset space ~
43297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43299 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43303 for an explanation.
43306 \begin_layout Subsection
43310 \begin_layout Standard
43313 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
43314 title or caption of a float.
43315 Inserts a short title as described in section
43316 \begin_inset space ~
43320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43322 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43329 \begin_layout Subsection
43330 كود لتيكس \SpecialChar TeX
43334 \begin_layout Standard
43337 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43338 Code box as described in section
43339 \begin_inset space ~
43343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43345 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43352 \begin_layout Subsection
43354 \begin_inset Index idx
43357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43366 \begin_layout Standard
43369 Inserts a program listings box.
43370 Program listings are explained in the chapter
43372 Program Code Listings
43377 \begin_inset space ~
43385 \begin_layout Subsection
43389 \begin_layout Standard
43392 Inserts the actual date.
43393 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
43398 \begin_layout Subsection
43402 \begin_layout Standard
43405 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43412 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43419 \begin_layout Section
43421 \begin_inset Index idx
43424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43433 \begin_layout Standard
43436 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43440 of the current document.
43441 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
43444 \begin_layout Subsection
43448 \begin_layout Standard
43451 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
43452 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
43453 to jump, for example, between section
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43458 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
43459 \begin_inset space ~
43462 2.5 and use the submenu
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset space ~
43476 \begin_inset space ~
43482 \begin_inset space ~
43486 \begin_inset space ~
43492 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
43498 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
43508 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
43513 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
43516 \begin_layout Standard
43519 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
43523 \begin_inset space ~
43528 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43536 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43539 \begin_layout Subsection
43540 الملاحظة التالية, التغيير, الإشارة المرجعية
43543 \begin_layout Standard
43546 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
43550 \begin_layout Subsection
43554 \begin_layout Standard
43557 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
43558 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
43559 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
43563 \begin_inset space ~
43567 \begin_inset space ~
43575 \begin_layout Subsection
43579 \begin_layout Standard
43582 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43585 The \SpecialChar LyX
43586 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43588 \begin_inset space ~
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43601 manual for a detailed description.
43604 \begin_layout Section
43606 \begin_inset Index idx
43609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43618 \begin_layout Subsection
43622 \begin_layout Standard
43625 Change Tracking is described in section
43626 \begin_inset space ~
43630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43632 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43639 \begin_layout Subsection
43643 \begin_layout Standard
43646 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43647 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
43648 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43650 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
43651 to the clipboard or update the view.
43652 \begin_inset Newline newline
43655 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43659 \begin_layout Standard
43664 Open Containing Directory
43666 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43667 's temporary folder for the document.
43668 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43669 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43670 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43671 For example some journals require to send the
43675 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43679 \begin_layout Subsection
43683 \begin_layout Standard
43686 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43687 as described in section
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43694 reference "sec:Appendices"
43701 \begin_layout Subsection
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43709 \begin_layout Standard
43712 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43713 default output format for the document (menu
43715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43716 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43717 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43719 \begin_inset space ~
43723 \begin_inset space ~
43729 \begin_inset space ~
43733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43735 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43739 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43742 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43743 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43748 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43750 \begin_inset space ~
43753 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43755 \begin_inset space ~
43759 \begin_inset space ~
43765 \begin_inset space ~
43769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43771 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43775 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43776 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43778 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43779 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43781 \begin_inset space ~
43784 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43789 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43799 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43804 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43805 when it is first configured.
43806 The default output format is
43809 \begin_inset space ~
43817 \begin_layout Subsection
43821 \begin_layout Standard
43824 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43825 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43826 actual document with an external program.
43827 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43828 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43829 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43831 All possible formats are listed in section
43832 \begin_inset space ~
43836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43838 reference "subsec:Export"
43843 You should at least see the menu entry
43848 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43850 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43860 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43865 \begin_inset Index idx
43868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 \begin_layout Standard
43882 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43883 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43885 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43886 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43888 \begin_inset space ~
43891 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43896 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43900 \begin_inset space ~
43904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43906 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43911 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43912 when it is first configured.
43915 \begin_layout Subsection
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43923 \begin_layout Standard
43926 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43927 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43930 \begin_layout Subsection
43934 \begin_layout Standard
43937 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43938 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43941 \begin_layout Subsection
43942 عرض المستند الرئيسي
43945 \begin_layout Standard
43948 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43964 \begin_inset space ~
43969 manual for more information on this topic).
43970 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43971 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43975 \begin_inset space ~
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43984 generates the output of the whole book, while
43988 will just output the chapter alone.
43991 \begin_layout Standard
43994 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43995 in the document settings (menu
43997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43998 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43999 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44001 \begin_inset space ~
44005 \begin_inset space ~
44011 \begin_inset space ~
44015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44017 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44021 ) or in the preferences (menu
44023 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44024 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44026 \begin_inset space ~
44029 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44031 \begin_inset space ~
44034 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44036 \begin_inset space ~
44040 \begin_inset space ~
44046 \begin_inset space ~
44050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44052 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44059 \begin_layout Subsection
44060 تحديث المستند الرئيسي
44063 \begin_layout Standard
44066 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44082 \begin_inset space ~
44087 manual for more information on this topic).
44088 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
44089 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
44092 \begin_layout Standard
44095 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44096 in the document settings (menu
44098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44099 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44100 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44112 \begin_inset space ~
44116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44118 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44122 ) or in the preferences (menu
44124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44125 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44127 \begin_inset space ~
44130 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44132 \begin_inset space ~
44135 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44141 \begin_inset space ~
44147 \begin_inset space ~
44151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44153 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44160 \begin_layout Subsection
44162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44164 name "subsec:Compressed"
44171 \begin_layout Standard
44174 Un/compresses the current document.
44175 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
44176 compression (see the
44178 Additional Features
44180 manual for details).
44183 \begin_layout Subsection
44187 \begin_layout Standard
44190 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
44193 \begin_layout Subsection
44197 \begin_layout Standard
44200 The document settings are described in appendix
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44207 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44214 \begin_layout Section
44216 \begin_inset Index idx
44219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44228 \begin_layout Subsection
44232 \begin_layout Standard
44235 Spell checking is explained in section
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44242 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44249 \begin_layout Subsection
44253 \begin_layout Standard
44256 The thesaurus is described in section
44257 \begin_inset space ~
44261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44263 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
44270 \begin_layout Subsection
44272 \begin_inset Index idx
44275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44282 \begin_inset Index idx
44285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44294 \begin_layout Standard
44297 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
44298 the highlighted document part.
44301 \begin_layout Subsection
44303 \begin_inset Index idx
44306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44315 \begin_layout Standard
44318 Generates with the help of the program
44320 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44323 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44324 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44325 This feature is not available on Windows.
44328 \begin_layout Subsection
44330 \begin_inset Index idx
44333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44342 \begin_layout Standard
44345 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44355 to see the full filename paths.
44358 \begin_layout Subsection
44360 \begin_inset Index idx
44363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44372 \begin_layout Standard
44375 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44376 files as described in section
44377 \begin_inset space ~
44381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44383 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44390 \begin_layout Subsection
44392 \begin_inset Index idx
44395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44396 ليك ! إعادة ضبط|أنظر
44400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44407 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44425 \begin_inset Index idx
44428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44437 \begin_layout Standard
44440 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
44441 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
44442 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44443 -packages and programs it needs; see
44445 \begin_inset space ~
44449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44451 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44458 \begin_layout Subsection
44462 \begin_layout Standard
44469 dialog as described in detail in appendix
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44476 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44483 \begin_layout Section
44485 \begin_inset Index idx
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44497 \begin_layout Standard
44500 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
44501 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
44503 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
44507 \begin_layout Standard
44513 \begin_inset space ~
44518 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
44519 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44520 packages and classes found
44521 by \SpecialChar LyX
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44529 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
44536 \begin_layout Standard
44542 \begin_inset space ~
44547 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
44552 \begin_layout Section
44554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44556 name "sec:Toolbars"
44563 \begin_layout Standard
44566 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
44567 \begin_inset space ~
44571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44573 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
44580 \begin_layout Standard
44583 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44584 This is described in the
44586 Additional Features
44591 \begin_layout Subsection
44593 \begin_inset Index idx
44596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44605 \begin_layout Standard
44606 \begin_inset Graphics
44607 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
44615 \begin_layout Standard
44616 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44622 \begin_layout Standard
44625 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44642 \begin_inset Note Note
44645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44648 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
44653 manual for more information.
44661 \begin_layout Standard
44664 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44670 \begin_layout Standard
44671 \begin_inset Tabular
44672 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
44673 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44674 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44675 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44681 \begin_inset Graphics
44682 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
44692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44696 pull-down box for the environments
44709 \begin_layout Standard
44712 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44718 \begin_layout Standard
44720 \begin_inset Tabular
44721 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
44722 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44723 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44724 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44748 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
44755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44778 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
44785 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44808 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
44815 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44824 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44838 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
44845 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44854 arg "spelling-continuously"
44862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44866 المصحح الإملائي المستمر
44872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44895 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44925 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44955 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44985 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
44992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45015 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45022 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45031 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
45039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45045 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45071 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45085 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45104 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45113 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
45121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45127 استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
45128 العلامات\SpecialChar menuseparator
45135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45156 تأكيد النص، دوال التحرير
45158 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45160 \begin_inset space ~
45163 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
45170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45191 تعيين النص كاسم، دوال التحرير
45193 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45198 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
45205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45214 arg "textstyle-apply"
45222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45226 تهيئة النص حسب إعدادات التحرير الحالية
45228 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45230 \begin_inset space ~
45233 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
45242 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45265 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
45266 رياضيات\SpecialChar menuseparator
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45286 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
45307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45314 arg "tabular-insert"
45322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45328 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
45335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45344 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
45352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45356 فتح وغلق نافذة الخلاصة،
45358 عرض\SpecialChar menuseparator
45365 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45374 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
45382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45386 فتح وغلق شريط الرياضيات
45392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45401 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
45409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45413 فتح وغلق شريط الجدول
45426 \begin_layout Subsection
45428 \begin_inset Index idx
45431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45440 \begin_layout Standard
45441 \begin_inset Graphics
45442 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
45450 \begin_layout Standard
45451 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45457 \begin_layout Standard
45460 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45464 \begin_layout Standard
45467 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45473 \begin_layout Standard
45474 \begin_inset Tabular
45475 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
45476 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45477 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45478 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45479 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45517 arg "layout Enumerate"
45525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45537 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45546 arg "layout Itemize"
45554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45595 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45604 arg "layout Description"
45612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45624 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45633 arg "depth-increment"
45641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45648 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45650 \begin_inset space ~
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45672 arg "depth-decrement"
45680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45687 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45689 \begin_inset space ~
45693 \begin_inset space ~
45702 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45711 arg "float-insert figure"
45719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45726 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45727 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45743 arg "float-insert table"
45751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45759 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45806 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45821 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45837 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45852 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45859 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45885 \begin_inset space ~
45894 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45903 arg "nomencl-insert"
45911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45920 \begin_inset space ~
45929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45938 arg "footnote-insert"
45946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45960 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45969 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45986 \begin_inset space ~
45995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46019 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46020 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46040 arg "box-insert Frameless"
46048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46086 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46119 \begin_inset space ~
46128 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46137 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
46145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46152 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46153 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
46160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46169 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
46177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46185 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46187 \begin_inset space ~
46196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46205 arg "dialog-show character"
46213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46220 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46222 \begin_inset space ~
46225 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46241 arg "layout-paragraph"
46249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46256 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46258 \begin_inset space ~
46267 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46276 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46305 \begin_layout Subsection
46306 عرض/تحديث شريط الأدوات
46307 \begin_inset Index idx
46310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46311 شريط أدوات ! عرض / تحديث
46319 \begin_layout Standard
46320 \begin_inset Graphics
46321 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
46328 \begin_layout Standard
46331 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46337 \begin_layout Standard
46340 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46344 \begin_layout Standard
46347 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46353 \begin_layout Standard
46354 \begin_inset Tabular
46355 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
46356 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46357 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46358 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46359 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46399 arg "buffer-update"
46407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46414 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46421 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46430 arg "master-buffer-view"
46438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46447 \begin_inset space ~
46456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46465 arg "master-buffer-update"
46473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46480 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46482 \begin_inset space ~
46486 \begin_inset space ~
46495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
46512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46520 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46521 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46522 Synchronize with Output
46528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46552 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46553 View (Other Formats)
46559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46566 arg "update-others"
46574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46582 Update (Other Formats)
46595 \begin_layout Standard
46598 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46602 \begin_layout Subsection
46603 أشرطة الأدوات الأخرى
46606 \begin_layout Standard
46609 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46610 \begin_inset space ~
46614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46616 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46620 , the table toolbar
46623 \begin_inset Index idx
46626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46637 \begin_inset space ~
46642 manual and the math macro toolbar
46645 \begin_inset Index idx
46648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 \begin_layout Chapter
46665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46667 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46672 \begin_inset Index idx
46675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46684 \begin_layout Standard
46690 \begin_inset space ~
46695 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46696 is called with the menu
46698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46702 You can save your document settings as default with the
46704 Save as Document Defaults
46706 button in any dialog.
46707 This will create a template named
46711 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46712 when you create a new document without
46716 \begin_layout Standard
46723 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46724 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46727 \begin_layout Standard
46730 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46731 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46732 to find the one you are looking for.
46733 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46734 the submenus of the dialog.
46736 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46740 \begin_inset space \space{}
46744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46751 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46752 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46753 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46756 \begin_layout Section
46760 \begin_layout Standard
46763 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46765 Document classes are described in section
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46772 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46780 \begin_layout Standard
46786 \begin_inset space ~
46791 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46796 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46797 as a layout for a document class.
46798 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46800 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46809 \begin_layout Standard
46812 Some classes use special class options by default.
46813 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46817 and you can decide to use them or not.
46818 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46819 recommended you leave them untouched.
46824 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46825 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46830 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46832 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46840 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46841 \begin_inset Newline newline
46846 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46849 \begin_inset Newline newline
46852 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46853 distribution, see section
46858 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46860 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46873 \begin_layout Standard
46880 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46881 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46882 in the background if the child document
46883 is opened without its master.
46884 This way child documents are always compilable.
46885 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46892 \begin_inset space ~
46900 \begin_layout Standard
46903 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46916 \begin_inset Index idx
46919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46920 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
46926 \begin_inset Index idx
46929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46930 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
46937 for cross-references, see section
46940 \begin_inset space ~
46944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46946 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46953 \begin_layout Section
46957 \begin_layout Standard
46960 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46961 Please refer to the section
46964 \begin_inset space ~
46972 \begin_inset space ~
46977 manual for details.
46980 \begin_layout Section
46984 \begin_layout Standard
46987 Modules are explained in section
46988 \begin_inset space ~
46992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46994 reference "subsec:Modules"
47001 \begin_layout Section
47005 \begin_layout Standard
47009 \begin_inset space ~
47013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47015 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
47022 \begin_layout Section
47026 \begin_layout Standard
47029 The document font settings are described in section
47030 \begin_inset space ~
47034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47036 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
47043 \begin_layout Section
47047 \begin_layout Standard
47050 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
47062 \begin_inset space ~
47067 and whether it should be a
47070 \begin_inset space ~
47075 can also be specified here.
47078 \begin_layout Standard
47081 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
47082 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
47083 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
47085 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
47088 \begin_layout Standard
47093 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
47096 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
47097 justifies the text on screen.
47098 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
47102 \begin_layout Section
47106 \begin_layout Standard
47109 This dialog is described in sections
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47116 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
47121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47123 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
47130 \begin_layout Section
47134 \begin_layout Standard
47137 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
47138 \begin_inset space ~
47142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47144 reference "subsec:Margins"
47151 \begin_layout Section
47153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47155 name "sec:Language-encodings"
47160 \begin_inset Index idx
47163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47172 \begin_layout Standard
47175 The document language and quote styles are set here.
47176 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47177 (the \SpecialChar LyX
47179 is always encoded in utf8).
47180 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
47181 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
47182 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47183 -command is not known for
47184 a particular character).
47187 \begin_layout Standard
47190 If you use the option
47195 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47196 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
47197 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47199 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
47200 exactly one encoding.
47201 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47204 \begin_layout Standard
47208 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
47209 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
47210 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47211 installation supports Unicode), choose
47212 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
47213 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47214 is quite incomplete, so
47215 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
47220 (when \SpecialChar LyX
47221 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47222 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
47223 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47224 -commands is not used, because all
47225 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
47226 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47227 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47228 , two new alternative engines
47229 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47231 Both engines support Unicode natively.
47233 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
47236 \begin_inset space ~
47244 \begin_inset space ~
47252 \begin_inset space ~
47258 \begin_inset space ~
47262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47264 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47269 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
47273 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
47276 \begin_layout Standard
47282 \begin_inset space ~
47287 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47288 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
47290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47298 The possible settings are:
47301 \begin_layout Description
47304 Default uses the language package that is selected in
47306 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47307 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47311 \begin_inset space ~
47315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47317 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47324 \begin_layout Description
47327 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
47328 format you will use.
47329 In many cases this will be
47336 \begin_inset Index idx
47339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47348 If the newer package
47355 \begin_inset Index idx
47358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47359 حزمة لتيك ! polyglossia
47366 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47367 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47368 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
47370 package will be used instead of
47377 \begin_layout Description
47381 \begin_inset space ~
47392 would be more appropriate.
47395 \begin_layout Description
47398 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
47399 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
47403 (for German texts), type in
47406 \begin_inset Newline newline
47411 usepackage{ngerman}
47414 \begin_layout Description
47417 None will not use a language package.
47418 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
47421 \begin_layout Standard
47424 Here is a list with the important encodings:
47427 \begin_layout Description
47431 \begin_inset space ~
47435 \begin_inset space ~
47439 \begin_inset space ~
47446 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47454 \begin_inset Index idx
47457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47458 حزمة لتيك ! inputenc
47466 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47467 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47468 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47472 \begin_layout Description
47475 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47477 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47478 commands, which may result in a big
47479 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47480 -commands are needed.
47483 \begin_layout Description
47487 \begin_inset space ~
47491 \begin_inset space ~
47494 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47497 \begin_layout Description
47501 \begin_inset space ~
47505 \begin_inset space ~
47508 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47511 \begin_layout Description
47515 \begin_inset space ~
47518 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47521 \begin_layout Description
47525 \begin_inset space ~
47529 \begin_inset space ~
47532 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47533 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47536 \begin_layout Description
47540 \begin_inset space ~
47544 \begin_inset space ~
47547 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47551 \begin_layout Description
47555 \begin_inset space ~
47559 \begin_inset space ~
47562 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47563 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47566 \begin_layout Description
47570 \begin_inset space ~
47574 \begin_inset space ~
47578 \begin_inset space ~
47581 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47582 \begin_inset space ~
47588 \begin_layout Description
47592 \begin_inset space ~
47596 \begin_inset space ~
47600 \begin_inset space ~
47603 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47604 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47607 \begin_layout Description
47611 \begin_inset space ~
47615 \begin_inset space ~
47618 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47619 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47620 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47621 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47622 \begin_inset space ~
47626 \begin_inset space ~
47632 \begin_layout Description
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47640 \begin_inset space ~
47643 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47644 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47645 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47647 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47648 \begin_inset space ~
47652 \begin_inset space ~
47658 \begin_layout Description
47662 \begin_inset space ~
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47669 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47672 \begin_layout Description
47676 \begin_inset space ~
47680 \begin_inset space ~
47683 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47686 \begin_layout Description
47690 \begin_inset space ~
47694 \begin_inset space ~
47697 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47700 \begin_layout Description
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47707 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47710 \begin_layout Description
47714 \begin_inset space ~
47717 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47720 \begin_layout Description
47724 \begin_inset space ~
47728 \begin_inset space ~
47731 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47734 \begin_layout Description
47738 \begin_inset space ~
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47748 \begin_layout Description
47752 \begin_inset space ~
47756 \begin_inset space ~
47759 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47762 \begin_layout Description
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47770 \begin_inset space ~
47776 \begin_layout Description
47780 \begin_inset space ~
47784 \begin_inset space ~
47787 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47795 \begin_inset Index idx
47798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47806 when using this, set the document language to
47811 \begin_layout Description
47815 \begin_inset space ~
47819 \begin_inset space ~
47822 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47827 , when using this, set the document language to
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47836 \begin_layout Description
47840 \begin_inset space ~
47844 \begin_inset space ~
47847 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47855 \begin_inset Index idx
47858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47859 حزمة لتيك ! japanese
47866 when using this, set the document language to
47871 \begin_layout Description
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47879 \begin_inset space ~
47882 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47887 , when using this, set the document language to
47892 \begin_layout Description
47896 \begin_inset space ~
47900 \begin_inset space ~
47903 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47908 , when using this, set the document language to
47913 \begin_layout Description
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47920 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47923 \begin_layout Description
47927 \begin_inset space ~
47931 \begin_inset space ~
47935 \begin_inset space ~
47938 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47941 \begin_layout Description
47945 \begin_inset space ~
47949 \begin_inset space ~
47953 \begin_inset space ~
47956 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47957 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47958 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47961 \begin_layout Description
47965 \begin_inset space ~
47969 \begin_inset space ~
47975 \begin_layout Description
47979 \begin_inset space ~
47983 \begin_inset space ~
47986 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47987 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47990 \begin_layout Description
47994 \begin_inset space ~
47998 \begin_inset space ~
48001 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48009 \begin_inset Index idx
48012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48020 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
48023 \begin_layout Description
48027 \begin_inset space ~
48035 \begin_inset space ~
48038 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
48045 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48048 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48055 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48056 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48058 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48061 \begin_layout Description
48065 \begin_inset space ~
48069 \begin_inset space ~
48072 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48080 \begin_inset Index idx
48083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48091 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
48094 \begin_layout Description
48098 \begin_inset space ~
48101 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48109 \begin_inset Index idx
48112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48113 حزمة لتيك ! inputenc
48121 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
48125 \begin_layout Description
48129 \begin_inset space ~
48133 \begin_inset space ~
48137 \begin_inset space ~
48140 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48141 \begin_inset space ~
48147 \begin_layout Description
48151 \begin_inset space ~
48155 \begin_inset space ~
48159 \begin_inset space ~
48162 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
48163 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
48164 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
48168 \begin_layout Description
48172 \begin_inset space ~
48176 \begin_inset space ~
48180 \begin_inset space ~
48183 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
48184 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48187 \begin_layout Section
48189 \begin_inset Index idx
48192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48199 \begin_inset Index idx
48202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48209 \begin_inset Index idx
48212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48219 \begin_inset Index idx
48222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48231 \begin_layout Standard
48234 Here you can alter the font color for the
48238 (default: black), for
48241 \begin_inset space ~
48246 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
48250 (default: white) and for
48253 \begin_inset space ~
48263 sets the color back to the default.
48266 \begin_layout Standard
48269 Clicking any button showing
48277 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
48278 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
48279 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
48280 later more quickly.
48283 \begin_layout Standard
48286 Note, if you change the
48289 \begin_inset space ~
48294 font color and use the option
48297 \begin_inset space ~
48302 in the document settings under
48305 \begin_inset space ~
48310 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
48311 \begin_inset space ~
48315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48317 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48324 \begin_layout Standard
48327 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
48333 \begin_layout Standard
48339 \begin_inset space ~
48348 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
48351 \begin_inset space ~
48354 Code after a forced page break:
48357 \begin_layout Itemize
48360 For the page color:
48361 \begin_inset Newline newline
48368 pagecolor{color name}
48371 \begin_layout Itemize
48374 For the text color:
48375 \begin_inset Newline newline
48385 \begin_layout Standard
48388 You are restricted to one of
48424 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
48431 \begin_inset space ~
48437 \begin_inset Newline newline
48440 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
48441 names to refer to them:
48444 \begin_layout Itemize
48452 \begin_inset Newline newline
48457 page_backgroundcolor
48460 \begin_layout Itemize
48466 \begin_inset space ~
48472 \begin_inset Newline newline
48480 \begin_layout Itemize
48486 \begin_inset space ~
48492 \begin_inset Newline newline
48500 \begin_layout Itemize
48506 \begin_inset space ~
48512 \begin_inset Newline newline
48520 \begin_layout Standard
48523 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
48526 \begin_inset space ~
48534 \begin_inset space ~
48542 \begin_layout Section
48543 الترقيم & جدول المحتويات
48546 \begin_layout Standard
48549 Here you can adjust the
48553 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48557 as described in section
48558 \begin_inset space ~
48562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48564 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48571 \begin_layout Section
48575 \begin_layout Standard
48578 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48586 \begin_inset Index idx
48589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48590 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
48600 \begin_inset Index idx
48603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48618 \begin_inset Index idx
48621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48622 حزمة لتيك ! jurabib
48630 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48633 Sectioned bibliography
48635 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48643 \begin_inset Index idx
48646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48647 حزمة لتيك ! bibtopic
48659 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48660 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48664 for the generation of the bibliography.
48665 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48666 \begin_inset space ~
48670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48672 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48679 \begin_layout Section
48683 \begin_layout Standard
48686 Here you can define the
48690 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48692 \begin_inset space ~
48696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48698 reference "sec:Index"
48705 \begin_layout Section
48709 \begin_layout Standard
48712 The PDF properties are explained in section
48715 \begin_inset space ~
48719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48721 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48728 \begin_layout Section
48732 \begin_layout Standard
48735 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48736 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48744 \begin_inset Index idx
48747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48748 حزمة لتيك ! amsmath
48758 \begin_inset Index idx
48761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48762 حزمة لتيك ! amssymb
48772 \begin_inset Index idx
48775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48786 \begin_inset Index idx
48789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48800 \begin_inset Index idx
48803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48804 حزمة لتيك ! mathdots
48814 \begin_inset Index idx
48817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48818 حزمة لتيك ! mathtools
48828 \begin_inset Index idx
48831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48842 \begin_inset Index idx
48845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48846 حزمة لتيك ! stackrel
48856 \begin_inset Index idx
48859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48860 حزمة لتيك ! stmaryrd
48870 \begin_inset Index idx
48873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48874 حزمة لتيك ! undertilde
48881 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48884 \begin_layout Description
48887 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48888 -errors in formulas,
48889 ensure that you have this enabled.
48892 \begin_layout Description
48895 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48896 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48897 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48901 \begin_layout Description
48904 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48907 \begin_inset space ~
48919 \begin_layout Description
48922 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48925 \begin_inset space ~
48937 \begin_layout Description
48940 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48951 \begin_layout Description
48954 mathtools is used for the math commands
48990 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48997 \begin_layout Description
49000 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
49002 Chemical Symbols and Equations
49011 \begin_layout Description
49014 stackrel is used for the math command
49031 \begin_layout Description
49034 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
49037 \begin_layout Description
49040 undertilde is used for the math command
49048 Accents for one Character
49057 \begin_layout Section
49061 \begin_layout Standard
49064 The float placement options are described in the section
49067 \begin_inset space ~
49075 \begin_inset space ~
49083 \begin_layout Section
49087 \begin_layout Standard
49090 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49092 Program Code Listings
49097 \begin_inset space ~
49105 \begin_layout Section
49109 \begin_layout Standard
49112 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49120 set to be used and set the
49125 The itemize environment is described in section
49126 \begin_inset space ~
49130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49132 reference "sec:Itemize"
49139 \begin_layout Standard
49142 You can furthermore specify a
49145 \begin_inset space ~
49150 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49151 command of the desired character.
49152 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
49159 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49165 \begin_inset space \space{}
49169 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49179 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
49180 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
49183 \begin_layout Standard
49186 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49195 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49196 -packages in the preamble (menu
49199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49203 \begin_inset space ~
49209 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
49213 usepackage{textcomp}
49216 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
49220 usepackage{amssymb}
49230 \begin_layout Section
49234 \begin_layout Standard
49237 Branches are described in section
49238 \begin_inset space ~
49242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49244 reference "sec:Branches"
49251 \begin_layout Section
49253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49255 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
49262 \begin_layout Standard
49265 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
49268 \begin_layout Description
49272 \begin_inset space ~
49276 \begin_inset space ~
49279 Format: The format that is used when you enter
49280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49299 View Master Document
49300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49307 Update Master Document
49308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49315 menu or the toolbar.
49316 The default is set in
49318 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49319 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49321 \begin_inset space ~
49324 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49328 \begin_inset space ~
49332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49334 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49341 \begin_layout Description
49345 \begin_inset space ~
49349 \begin_inset space ~
49352 Output settings for the menu
49354 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49356 \begin_inset space ~
49362 For a detailed description see section
49364 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49369 \begin_inset space ~
49377 \begin_layout Description
49381 \begin_inset space ~
49385 \begin_inset space ~
49388 Options offers settings for the export format
49396 \begin_inset space ~
49401 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49402 \begin_inset space ~
49405 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49409 \begin_inset space ~
49414 settings are described in detail in section
49416 Math Output in XHTML
49421 \begin_inset space ~
49430 \begin_inset space ~
49434 \begin_inset space ~
49439 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49442 \begin_layout Description
49446 \begin_inset space ~
49451 Save transient properties
49453 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49454 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49455 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49459 \begin_layout Itemize
49462 the activation of change tracking
49465 \begin_layout Itemize
49468 the output of tracked changes
49471 \begin_layout Itemize
49474 the recording of the document directory path.
49477 \begin_layout Standard
49480 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49481 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49485 \begin_layout Section
49489 \begin_layout Standard
49492 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49494 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49496 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49498 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49502 \begin_layout Standard
49505 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49506 -syntax is given in section
49507 \begin_inset space ~
49511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49513 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49520 \begin_layout Chapter
49522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49524 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49529 \begin_inset Index idx
49532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49541 \begin_layout Standard
49544 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49546 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49550 It has the following submenus.
49553 \begin_layout Section
49557 \begin_layout Subsection
49561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49563 \begin_inset Index idx
49566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49567 تخصيص ! أشرطة الأدوات
49573 \begin_inset Index idx
49576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49577 تخصيص ! قائمة رئيسية
49585 \begin_layout Standard
49588 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49589 interface (ui) file.
49590 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49598 \begin_layout Description
49605 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49608 \begin_layout Description
49617 the menu entries in popup context menus
49620 \begin_layout Description
49627 specifies the toolbar buttons
49630 \begin_layout Standard
49633 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49634 and edit the entries.
49637 \begin_layout Standard
49640 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49652 entries must be finished with an explicit
49677 and in the case of the
49678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49690 The syntax for the entries is:
49693 \begin_layout Standard
49696 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49725 \begin_layout Standard
49729 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49732 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49733 -functions are listed in the menu
49735 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49737 \begin_inset space ~
49745 \begin_layout Standard
49748 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49754 \begin_layout Standard
49757 For example, assuming you use the menu
49759 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49762 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49766 \begin_layout Standard
49769 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49793 \begin_layout Standard
49797 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49812 to have the sixth bookmark.
49815 \begin_layout Standard
49820 \begin_inset space ~
49825 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49826 's toolbar buttons.
49827 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49828 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49831 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49839 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49843 \begin_layout Standard
49848 Enable tool tips in main work area
49850 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49858 \begin_layout Standard
49864 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49865 should display in the menu
49867 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49869 \begin_inset space ~
49877 \begin_layout Subsection
49881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49885 \begin_layout Standard
49890 Restore window layouts and geometries
49893 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49894 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49898 \begin_layout Standard
49903 Restore cursor positions
49905 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49909 \begin_layout Standard
49914 Load opened files from last session
49916 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49920 \begin_layout Standard
49925 Clear all session information
49927 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49928 sessions (cursor positions, names
49929 of last opened documents, etc.).
49932 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49933 النسخ الاحتياطي & الحفظ
49934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49936 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49941 \begin_inset Index idx
49944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49945 نسخ احتياطي ! مستندات
49953 \begin_layout Standard
49957 Backup original documents when saving
49959 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49960 it was saved the last time.
49961 It is stored in the
49964 \begin_inset space ~
49970 \begin_inset space ~
49974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49976 reference "sec:Paths"
49980 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49983 \begin_inset space ~
49989 The backup file has the file extension
49990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50004 \begin_layout Standard
50009 Backup documents, every
50011 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
50014 \begin_layout Standard
50018 Save documents compressed by default
50020 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50021 \begin_inset space ~
50025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50027 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50032 This applies to newly created documents only.
50033 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50037 النافذة & مساحة العمل
50040 \begin_layout Standard
50045 Open documents in tabs
50047 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50051 \begin_layout Standard
50058 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50067 \begin_inset space ~
50071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50073 reference "sec:Paths"
50077 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50084 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
50085 documents will be opened in the same running instance
50086 of \SpecialChar LyX
50088 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50089 instance is created for each file.
50092 \begin_layout Standard
50097 Single close-tab button
50099 is checked, there will only be one close button (
50111 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50112 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50113 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
50117 \begin_layout Standard
50120 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50129 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
50130 before the change takes effect.
50138 \begin_layout Standard
50145 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
50147 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
50149 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50153 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
50154 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
50155 and only want to close the view in once instance.
50158 \begin_layout Subsection
50160 \begin_inset Index idx
50163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50172 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
50179 \begin_layout Standard
50182 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
50186 \begin_layout Standard
50189 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50198 This section only deals with the fonts
50202 the \SpecialChar LyX
50204 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
50207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50208 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50219 \begin_layout Standard
50222 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
50239 (depends on the system) as its
50242 \begin_inset space ~
50258 \begin_layout Standard
50261 You can change the font size with the
50268 \begin_layout Standard
50275 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
50277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50280 points have the size of 1
50281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50285 \begin_inset space ~
50289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50291 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
50296 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
50297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50301 The sizes are explained in detail in section
50302 \begin_inset space ~
50306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50308 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
50315 \begin_layout Subsection
50317 \begin_inset Index idx
50320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50327 \begin_inset Index idx
50330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50339 \begin_layout Standard
50342 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
50343 by choosing an item in the
50344 list and selecting the
50351 \begin_layout Standard
50354 By checking the option
50358 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
50361 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
50362 \begin_inset space ~
50366 \begin_inset space ~
50371 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
50374 \begin_layout Subsection
50376 \begin_inset Index idx
50379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50388 \begin_layout Standard
50391 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
50395 \begin_layout Standard
50401 enables previewing snippets of your document.
50402 This feature is described in section
50403 \begin_inset space ~
50407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50409 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50416 \begin_layout Standard
50419 Checking the option
50422 \begin_inset space ~
50426 \begin_inset space ~
50430 \begin_inset space ~
50435 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
50438 \begin_layout Section
50440 \begin_inset Index idx
50443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50452 \begin_layout Subsection
50456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50460 \begin_layout Standard
50465 Cursor follows scrollbar
50467 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50471 \begin_layout Standard
50474 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50475 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50476 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50479 \begin_layout Standard
50483 Scroll below end of document
50485 is self-explanatory.
50488 \begin_layout Standard
50491 In \SpecialChar LyX
50492 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50499 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50501 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50502 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50505 \begin_layout Standard
50510 Sort environments alphabetically
50512 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50515 \begin_layout Standard
50520 Group environments by their category
50522 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50525 \begin_layout Standard
50532 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50547 \begin_layout Standard
50550 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50555 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50556 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50560 \begin_layout Subsection
50562 \begin_inset Index idx
50565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50572 \begin_inset Index idx
50575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50584 \begin_layout Standard
50590 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50592 Several binding files are available, among them:
50595 \begin_layout Description
50598 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50601 \begin_layout Description
50604 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50616 \begin_layout Description
50619 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50630 \begin_layout Standard
50633 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50638 , and binding files for special languages.
50639 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50644 \begin_inset space \space{}
50648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50656 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50657 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50658 will try to use the appropriate binding
50662 \begin_layout Standard
50665 Some binding files, like
50669 , only have a limited scope.
50670 When looking at the end of the file
50674 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50677 \begin_layout Standard
50683 \begin_inset space ~
50687 \begin_inset space ~
50692 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50693 in the selected key binding file.
50696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50700 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50705 \begin_inset Index idx
50708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50709 مفتاح الربط ! تحرير
50717 \begin_layout Standard
50720 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50721 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50722 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50723 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50726 Show key-bindings containing
50729 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50730 Insert there for example as keyword
50731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50738 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50739 functions that contain
50740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50748 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50749 All \SpecialChar LyX
50750 functions are also listed in the file
50755 that you will find in the
50762 \begin_layout Standard
50765 For example, to add the shortcut
50773 , select the function and press the
50778 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50779 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50782 \begin_layout Standard
50785 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50786 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50788 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
50789 function names as a semicolon separated list.
50791 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50796 \begin_layout Standard
50799 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50802 \begin_layout Standard
50805 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50807 The syntax of the entries is:
50810 \begin_layout Standard
50817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50836 \begin_layout Standard
50839 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50840 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50868 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50869 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50870 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50871 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50873 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50877 , you needed to specify it as
50882 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50885 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50888 \begin_layout Subsection
50889 لوحة المفاتيح/الفارة
50890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50892 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50897 \begin_inset Index idx
50900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50901 خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
50907 \begin_inset Index idx
50910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50911 إعدادات ! خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
50919 \begin_layout Standard
50922 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50923 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50924 provides keyboard maps.
50925 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50926 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50929 \begin_inset space ~
50933 \begin_inset space ~
50938 and select the keyboard map file named
50945 \begin_layout Standard
50956 keyboard map and, if you use the
50960 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50965 arg "keymap-primary"
50975 arg "keymap-secondary"
50980 respectively or toggle between them with
50985 arg "keymap-toggle"
50993 \begin_layout Standard
50996 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51005 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
51014 \begin_layout Standard
51017 You can also specify the mouse
51019 Wheel scrolling speed
51022 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
51026 Middle mouse button pasting
51028 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
51029 inserts the content of the clipboard.
51032 \begin_layout Standard
51042 \begin_inset space ~
51046 \begin_inset space ~
51051 you can select a key for zooming.
51052 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
51055 \begin_layout Subsection
51056 الإكمال التلقائي للمدخلات
51059 \begin_layout Standard
51062 Input completion is described in section
51063 \begin_inset space ~
51067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51069 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51076 \begin_layout Section
51078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51085 \begin_inset Index idx
51088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51095 \begin_inset Index idx
51098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51107 \begin_layout Standard
51110 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
51111 are normally determined during
51113 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
51116 \begin_layout Description
51120 \begin_inset space ~
51123 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
51124 's working directory.
51125 It is the default when you
51136 \begin_inset space ~
51144 \begin_layout Description
51148 \begin_inset space ~
51151 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
51153 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51155 \begin_inset space ~
51159 \begin_inset space ~
51167 \begin_layout Description
51171 \begin_inset space ~
51174 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
51180 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51184 \begin_inset Newline newline
51188 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51201 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
51202 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
51210 \begin_layout Description
51214 \begin_inset space ~
51220 \begin_inset Index idx
51223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51231 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
51232 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
51233 \begin_inset space ~
51237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51239 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51247 will be used to save the backups.
51248 \begin_inset Newline newline
51251 Backup files have the ending
51252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51262 \begin_layout Description
51266 \begin_inset space ~
51269 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
51270 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
51272 \begin_inset Newline newline
51279 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51285 You can edit this file with the program
51294 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
51295 in its preferences under
51298 \begin_inset space ~
51304 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
51309 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
51311 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
51312 in your \SpecialChar LyX
51318 and \SpecialChar LyX
51319 need to be running the same time.
51320 \begin_inset Newline newline
51323 The pipe is also used for the
51327 feature, see section
51328 \begin_inset space ~
51332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51334 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51339 \begin_inset Newline newline
51342 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
51343 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
51344 \begin_inset Newline newline
51360 \begin_layout Description
51364 \begin_inset space ~
51367 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
51370 \begin_layout Description
51374 \begin_inset space ~
51377 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
51378 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
51379 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
51382 \begin_layout Description
51386 \begin_inset space ~
51389 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
51395 You only need to specify it if you are using
51399 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
51401 For \SpecialChar LyX
51406 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
51410 \begin_layout Description
51414 \begin_inset space ~
51417 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
51418 When \SpecialChar LyX
51419 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
51420 to find it on the system.
51421 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
51423 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
51425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51432 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
51433 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51436 \begin_layout Description
51440 \begin_inset space ~
51443 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51444 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51445 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51446 code or in the document
51448 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51450 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51451 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51452 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51453 scanned for the input files.
51454 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51455 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51457 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51458 compilation may fail for some documents.
51461 \begin_layout Section
51465 \begin_layout Standard
51468 Here you can insert your
51477 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51479 \begin_inset space ~
51483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51485 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51489 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51492 \begin_layout Section
51494 \begin_inset Index idx
51497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51504 \begin_inset Index idx
51507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51516 \begin_layout Subsection
51518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51520 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51527 \begin_layout Description
51531 \begin_inset space ~
51535 \begin_inset space ~
51538 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51540 You can find its actual translation status here:
51541 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51543 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51551 \begin_layout Description
51555 \begin_inset space ~
51558 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51559 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51560 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51561 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51578 The most widespread language package is
51585 \begin_inset Index idx
51588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51596 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51598 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51599 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51600 come with the alternative
51608 \begin_inset Index idx
51611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51612 حزمة لتيك ! polyglossia
51619 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51620 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51626 The available selections are described in section
51627 \begin_inset space ~
51631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51633 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51640 \begin_layout Description
51644 \begin_inset space ~
51647 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51648 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51649 you can here specify the command to start the package.
51650 An example is the start command
51656 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51658 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51662 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51678 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51683 \begin_layout Description
51687 \begin_inset space ~
51695 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51696 command toggles the package on and off.
51699 \begin_layout Description
51703 \begin_inset space ~
51707 \begin_inset space ~
51710 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51714 \begin_layout Description
51718 \begin_inset space ~
51722 \begin_inset space ~
51725 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51729 \begin_layout Description
51733 \begin_inset space ~
51737 \begin_inset space ~
51740 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
51741 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
51742 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51744 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51751 \begin_layout Description
51755 \begin_inset space ~
51758 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
51760 When this option is not set, the
51763 \begin_inset space ~
51768 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51770 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51773 \begin_inset space ~
51781 \begin_layout Description
51785 \begin_inset space ~
51791 \begin_inset space ~
51797 When it is not set, the
51800 \begin_inset space ~
51805 is set to the end of the document.
51808 \begin_layout Description
51812 \begin_inset space ~
51816 \begin_inset space ~
51819 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
51820 language will be underlined in blue.
51823 \begin_layout Description
51827 \begin_inset space ~
51831 \begin_inset space ~
51834 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51835 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51838 \begin_layout Description
51842 \begin_inset space ~
51845 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
51846 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51847 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
51848 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51851 \begin_layout Subsection
51855 \begin_layout Standard
51858 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51859 \begin_inset space ~
51863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51865 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51872 \begin_layout Section
51876 \begin_layout Subsection
51878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51880 name "subsec:General-output"
51887 \begin_layout Description
51891 \begin_inset space ~
51894 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51896 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51898 \begin_inset space ~
51904 For a detailed description see section
51906 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51911 \begin_inset space ~
51919 \begin_layout Description
51923 \begin_inset space ~
51926 Options Options for the program
51930 that is used for the export format
51935 \begin_inset space ~
51939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51941 reference "subsec:Export"
51946 Possible options are listed in the
51951 \begin_inset Newline newline
51955 \begin_inset Flex URL
51958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51960 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51970 \begin_layout Description
51974 \begin_inset space ~
51978 \begin_inset space ~
51981 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51984 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51985 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51987 \begin_inset space ~
51993 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51996 \begin_layout Description
52000 \begin_inset space ~
52006 \begin_inset Index idx
52009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52016 \begin_inset Index idx
52019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52020 إعدادات ! هيئة التاريخ
52027 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52028 \begin_inset Newline newline
52032 \begin_inset Flex URL
52035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52037 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52043 \begin_inset Newline newline
52046 For example the format
52047 \begin_inset Newline newline
52051 \begin_inset Newline newline
52054 prints the date as day/month/year.
52057 \begin_layout Description
52061 \begin_inset space ~
52065 \begin_inset space ~
52068 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52069 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52072 \begin_layout Subsection
52074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52076 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52081 \begin_inset Index idx
52084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52093 \begin_layout Description
52097 \begin_inset space ~
52105 \begin_inset space ~
52109 \begin_inset space ~
52112 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52117 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52138 are used for Cyrillic.
52139 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52152 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52154 sets up in the background.
52155 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52158 \begin_layout Description
52162 \begin_inset space ~
52166 \begin_inset space ~
52170 \begin_inset space ~
52174 \begin_inset space ~
52177 options They only have an effect when the program
52181 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52184 \begin_layout Standard
52187 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52188 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52189 manuals of the applications.
52192 \begin_layout Description
52196 \begin_inset space ~
52199 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52200 \begin_inset space ~
52204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52206 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52213 \begin_layout Description
52217 \begin_inset space ~
52220 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52221 \begin_inset space ~
52225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52227 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52234 \begin_layout Description
52238 \begin_inset space ~
52241 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52242 \begin_inset space ~
52246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52248 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52255 \begin_layout Description
52263 \begin_inset space ~
52266 command Command for the program
52268 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52271 that is described in the section
52273 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52278 Additional Features
52283 \begin_layout Standard
52286 There are additionally the following options:
52289 \begin_layout Description
52293 \begin_inset space ~
52297 \begin_inset space ~
52301 \begin_inset space ~
52305 \begin_inset space ~
52310 \begin_inset space ~
52313 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52331 to separate folders.
52332 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52336 \begin_inset Index idx
52339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52346 \begin_inset Index idx
52349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52358 \begin_layout Description
52362 \begin_inset space ~
52366 \begin_inset space ~
52370 \begin_inset space ~
52374 \begin_inset space ~
52378 \begin_inset space ~
52382 \begin_inset space ~
52385 changes Removes all manually set
52391 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52392 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52394 \begin_inset space ~
52399 dialog when changing the document class.
52402 \begin_layout Section
52404 \begin_inset Index idx
52407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52416 \begin_layout Subsection
52418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52420 name "subsec:Converters"
52425 \begin_inset Index idx
52428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52437 \begin_layout Standard
52440 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52441 from one format to another.
52442 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52443 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52450 \begin_inset space ~
52455 field and press the
52460 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52464 \begin_inset space ~
52469 drop-down list, modify the
52473 field and press the
52480 \begin_layout Standard
52485 Converter File Cache
52491 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52493 Maximum Age (in days
52496 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52497 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52500 \begin_layout Standard
52503 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52504 definition, is described in the section
52515 \begin_layout Subsection
52517 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52519 name "sec:File-Formats"
52524 \begin_inset Index idx
52527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52534 \begin_inset Index idx
52537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52546 \begin_layout Standard
52549 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52559 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52562 \begin_layout Standard
52565 You can also define the
52567 Default output format
52569 that is used when you use
52571 View, Update, View Master Document
52575 Update Master Document
52581 menu or the toolbar.
52584 \begin_layout Standard
52587 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52598 \begin_layout Standard
52601 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52603 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52604 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52605 This is done by specifying a
52610 More about this is described in the section
52621 \begin_layout Chapter
52622 الوحدات المتاحة في \SpecialChar LyX
52624 \begin_inset Index idx
52627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52636 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52643 \begin_layout Standard
52647 \begin_inset space ~
52651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52653 reference "tab:Units"
52657 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52658 and used in this documentation.
52661 \begin_layout Standard
52664 \begin_inset Float table
52670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52673 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52695 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52705 \begin_inset Tabular
52706 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52707 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52708 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52709 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52710 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52887 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52891 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53210 scaled point (65536
53211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53290 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53438 % of original image width
53443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53449 \begin_inset space ~
53459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53544 \begin_layout Standard
53547 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53550 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53557 \begin_layout Bibliography
53558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53559 LatexCommand bibitem
53566 فريق \SpecialChar LyX
53568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53571 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53577 \begin_inset Newline newline
53581 \begin_inset Flex URL
53584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53586 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53594 \begin_layout Bibliography
53595 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53596 LatexCommand bibitem
53597 key "latexcompanion"
53604 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53606 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53607 Companion Second Edition.
53610 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53613 \begin_layout Bibliography
53614 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53615 LatexCommand bibitem
53623 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53626 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53630 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53633 \begin_layout Bibliography
53634 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53635 LatexCommand bibitem
53646 : A Document Preparation System.
53649 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53652 \begin_layout Bibliography
53653 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53654 LatexCommand bibitem
53666 The \SpecialChar TeX
53670 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53673 \begin_layout Bibliography
53674 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53675 LatexCommand bibitem
53683 The \SpecialChar TeX
53687 \begin_inset Newline newline
53691 \begin_inset Flex URL
53694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53696 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
53704 \begin_layout Bibliography
53705 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53706 LatexCommand bibitem
53714 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53718 \begin_inset Newline newline
53722 \begin_inset Flex URL
53725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53727 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53735 \begin_layout Bibliography
53736 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53737 LatexCommand bibitem
53746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53748 name "Documentation"
53749 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53758 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53762 \begin_inset Newline newline
53766 \begin_inset Flex URL
53769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53771 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53779 \begin_layout Bibliography
53780 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53781 LatexCommand bibitem
53790 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53792 name "Documentation"
53793 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53798 how to use the program
53802 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53806 \begin_inset Newline newline
53810 \begin_inset Flex URL
53813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53815 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53823 \begin_layout Bibliography
53824 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53825 LatexCommand bibitem
53834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53836 name "Documentation"
53837 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53842 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53850 \begin_inset Index idx
53853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53854 حزمة لتيك ! biblatex
53860 \begin_inset Newline newline
53864 \begin_inset Flex URL
53867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53869 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53877 \begin_layout Bibliography
53878 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53879 LatexCommand bibitem
53888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53890 name "Documentation"
53891 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53896 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53904 \begin_inset Index idx
53907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53914 \begin_inset Newline newline
53918 \begin_inset Flex URL
53921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53923 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53931 \begin_layout Bibliography
53932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53933 LatexCommand bibitem
53942 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53944 name "Documentation"
53945 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53957 \begin_inset Newline newline
53961 \begin_inset Flex URL
53964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53966 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53974 \begin_layout Bibliography
53975 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53976 LatexCommand bibitem
53977 key "makeindex-man"
53985 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53988 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
54000 \begin_inset Newline newline
54004 \begin_inset Flex URL
54007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54009 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
54017 \begin_layout Bibliography
54018 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54019 LatexCommand bibitem
54028 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54030 name "Documentation"
54031 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
54043 \begin_inset Newline newline
54047 \begin_inset Flex URL
54050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54052 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
54060 \begin_layout Bibliography
54061 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54062 LatexCommand bibitem
54071 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54073 name "Documentation"
54074 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
54079 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
54083 \begin_inset Newline newline
54087 \begin_inset Flex URL
54090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54092 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
54100 \begin_layout Bibliography
54101 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54102 LatexCommand bibitem
54111 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54113 name "Documentation"
54114 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
54119 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54127 \begin_inset Index idx
54130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54131 حزمة لتيك ! caption
54137 \begin_inset Newline newline
54141 \begin_inset Flex URL
54144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54146 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54154 \begin_layout Bibliography
54155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54156 LatexCommand bibitem
54165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54167 name "Documentation"
54168 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54173 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54181 \begin_inset Index idx
54184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54185 حزمة لتيك ! enumitem
54191 \begin_inset Newline newline
54195 \begin_inset Flex URL
54198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54200 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54208 \begin_layout Bibliography
54209 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54210 LatexCommand bibitem
54219 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54221 name "Documentation"
54222 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54227 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54235 \begin_inset Index idx
54238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54239 حزمة لتيك ! fancyhdr
54245 \begin_inset Newline newline
54249 \begin_inset Flex URL
54252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54254 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54262 \begin_layout Bibliography
54263 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54264 LatexCommand bibitem
54273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54275 name "Documentation"
54276 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54281 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54289 \begin_inset Index idx
54292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54293 حزمة لتيك ! hyperref
54299 \begin_inset Newline newline
54303 \begin_inset Flex URL
54306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54308 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54316 \begin_layout Bibliography
54317 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54318 LatexCommand bibitem
54327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54329 name "Documentation"
54330 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54335 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54343 \begin_inset Index idx
54346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54347 حزمة لتيك ! microtpye
54353 \begin_inset Newline newline
54357 \begin_inset Flex URL
54360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54362 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54370 \begin_layout Bibliography
54371 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54372 LatexCommand bibitem
54381 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54383 name "Documentation"
54384 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54389 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54397 \begin_inset Index idx
54400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54401 حزمة لتيك ! nomencl
54407 \begin_inset Newline newline
54411 \begin_inset Flex URL
54414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54416 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54424 \begin_layout Bibliography
54425 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54426 LatexCommand bibitem
54435 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54437 name "Documentation"
54438 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54443 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54451 \begin_inset Index idx
54454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54455 حزمة لتيك ! prettyref
54461 \begin_inset Newline newline
54465 \begin_inset Flex URL
54468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54470 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54478 \begin_layout Bibliography
54479 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54480 LatexCommand bibitem
54489 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54491 name "Documentation"
54492 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54497 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54505 \begin_inset Index idx
54508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54509 حزمة لتيك ! refstyle
54515 \begin_inset Newline newline
54519 \begin_inset Flex URL
54522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54524 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54532 \begin_layout Bibliography
54533 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54534 LatexCommand bibitem
54543 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54546 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54551 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54555 \begin_inset Newline newline
54559 \begin_inset Flex URL
54562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54564 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54572 \begin_layout Bibliography
54573 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54574 LatexCommand bibitem
54583 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54586 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54591 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54595 \begin_inset Newline newline
54599 \begin_inset Flex URL
54602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54604 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54612 \begin_layout Bibliography
54613 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54614 LatexCommand bibitem
54623 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54626 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54631 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54632 for Cyrillic languages
54635 \begin_inset Newline newline
54639 \begin_inset Flex URL
54642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54644 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54652 \begin_layout Bibliography
54653 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54654 LatexCommand bibitem
54663 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54666 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54671 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54675 \begin_inset Newline newline
54679 \begin_inset Flex URL
54682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54684 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54692 \begin_layout Bibliography
54693 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54694 LatexCommand bibitem
54703 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54706 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54711 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54715 \begin_inset Newline newline
54719 \begin_inset Flex URL
54722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54724 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54732 \begin_layout Bibliography
54733 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54734 LatexCommand bibitem
54743 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54746 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54751 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54755 \begin_inset Newline newline
54759 \begin_inset Flex URL
54762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54764 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54772 \begin_layout Standard
54773 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54809 \begin_inset Note Note
54812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54821 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54822 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54823 bibliography is the second one:
54831 \begin_layout Standard
54832 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54833 LatexCommand bibtex
54834 btprint "btPrintCited"
54835 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
54836 options "../biblio/alphadin"
54843 \begin_layout Standard
54846 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54850 \begin_layout Standard
54854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54860 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54869 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54879 \begin_inset Note Note
54882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54885 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54886 \begin_inset space ~
54890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54892 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54904 \begin_layout Standard
54905 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54906 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54912 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54913 LatexCommand printindex